Service Manual CLX-8540ND Ver1.1 111103 PDF

Service Manual
DIGITAL COLOR LASER MFP

CLX-8540ND
High-Speed Single-Path Color A4 MFP ■ 160 GB HDD

The keynote of Product
■ High Performance CCDM

■ 38 / 38 ppm Network-ready CMFP ■ Easy to install ( CRU & Option )
■ 20K/15K Black/Color toner ■ Color Graphic Touch-Screen LCD
■ 30K CMYK Imaging unit ■ Low Cost per Page
■ 100K ITB ■ Direct USB
■ Paper handling ■ Giga-bit Network
: Up to 3 x 500sh Cassette + 100sh MP ■ S/W Option
: Finisher with stapler and offset stacking : N/W Scan Enabler (Scan to Email/FTP/SMB/Client)
: 100sh DADF : SmarThru Workflow
GSPN (Global Service Partner Network)
North America : service.samsungportal.com

Latin America : latin.samsungportal.com
CIS : cis.samsungportal.com
Europe : europe.samsungportal.com
China : china.samsungportal.com ⓒ Samsung Electronics Co.,Ltd. September. 2009
Asia : asia.samsungportal.com Printed in Korea.
Mideast & Africa : mea.samsungportal.com VERSION NO. : 1.00 CODE : 8540-0000E
Contents
chapter 1 Precautions
1.1 Safety warning… …………………………………………………… 1-1
1.2 Caution for safety…………………………………………………… 1-2
1.3 ESD precautions… ………………………………………………… 1-5
chapter 2 Product overview

2.1 Product summary…………………………………………………… 2-1
2.2 Specifications… …………………………………………………… 2-3
2.2.1 General print engine…………………………………………… 2-3
2.2.2 Controller & S/W… …………………………………………… 2-3
2.2.3 Scan… ………………………………………………………… 2-6
2.2.4 Copy… ………………………………………………………… 2-7
2.2.5 Fax… …………………………………………………………… 2-8
2.2.6 Paper handling… ……………………………………………… 2-10
2.2.7 Consumables (CRU : customer replacement unit)… ……… 2-14
2.2.8 Maintenance parts (FRU : field replacement unit)… ……… 2-15
2.2.9 Service & Environment………………………………………… 2-15
2.2.10 Options………………………………………………………… 2-16
2.2.11 Model comparison… ………………………………………… 2-17
2.3 System overview… ………………………………………………… 2-18
2.3.1 System configuration… ……………………………………… 2-21
2.3.2 H/W configuration……………………………………………… 2-22
2.3.3 Mechanic configuration ……………………………………… 2-40
2.3.4 Control panel…………………………………………………… 2-52
2.3.5 Graphic user interface overview……………………………… 2-56
chapter 3 Maintenance and disassembly

3.1 Maintenance………………………………………………………… 3-1
Contents
3.1.1 Precautions on maintenance… ……………………………… 3-1

3.1.2 Check the consumables life… ……………………………… 3-2
3.1.3 Consumables (CRU : customer replacement unit)… ……… 3-3
3.1.4 Replacing the consumables.… ……………………………… 3-4
3.1.5 Maintenance parts (FRU : field replacement unit)… ……… 3-8
3.1.6 Location of maintenance parts… …………………………… 3-10
3.1.7 Replacing the maintenance parts… ………………………… 3-11
3.1.8 Cleaning the machine… ……………………………………… 3-22
3.2 Disassembly and reassembly……………………………………… 3-28
3.2.1 General precautions on disassembly………………………… 3-28
3.2.2 General disassembly… ……………………………………… 3-33
3.2.2.1 Cover… …………………………………………………… 3-34
3.2.2.2 DADF Unit… ……………………………………………… 3-35
3.2.2.3 OPE………………………………………………………… 3-37
3.2.2.4 Scan Ass’y………………………………………………… 3-38
3.2.2.5 Video board… …………………………………………… 3-44
3.2.2.6 Engine Board……………………………………………… 3-45
3.2.2.7 SMPS board and FDB board… ………………………… 3-46
3.2.2.8 Main Drive Unit… ………………………………………… 3-47
3.2.2.9 Deve Drive Unit…………………………………………… 3-49
3.2.2.10 Fuser Drive Unit… ……………………………………… 3-49
3.2.2.11 LSU… …………………………………………………… 3-50
3.2.2.12 HVPS board……………………………………………… 3-52
3.2.2.13 Side Duplex ……………………………………………… 3-54
3.2.2.14 ACR/CTD Sensor… …………………………………… 3-57
3.2.2.15 Duplex Sensor…………………………………………… 3-59
3.2.2.16 Exit Sensor… …………………………………………… 3-60
3.2.2.17 Feed Sensor… ………………………………………… 3-61
3.2.2.18 Regi Sensor……………………………………………… 3-62
3.2.2.19 WTB Full Sensor………………………………………… 3-63
3.2.2.20 1-bin Finisher… ………………………………………… 3-65
Contents
3.2.2.21 Mail box… ……………………………………………… 3-70

3.2.2.22 2-Bin Finisher… ………………………………………… 3-74
3.2.3 Boards and Connectors… …………………………………… 3-79
chapter 4 Troubleshooting
4.1 Paper jam… ………………………………………………………… 4-1
4.1.1 Paper jam and clearing intruction… ………………………… 4-2
4.2 Firmware upgrade………………………………………………… 4-18
4.2.1 Using the common method…………………………………… 4-18
4.2.2 F/W upgrade using SWAS (syncthru web admin service)… 4-19
4.3 Diagnostic mode (Tech mode)… ………………………………… 4-22
4.3.1 Diagnostic mode menu… …………………………………… 4-22
4.3.2 Diagnostics menu map………………………………………… 4-24
4.3.3 Information tab… ……………………………………………… 4-25
4.3.4 Fault history tab………………………………………………… 4-29
4.3.5 Test routines tab … …………………………………………… 4-31
4.4 Troubleshooting…………………………………………………… 4-65
4.4.1 Procedure of checking the symptoms… …………………… 4-65
4.4.2 Error code and message……………………………………… 4-66
4.4.3 Troubleshooting for error code… …………………………… 4-72
4.4.4 Image quality problems and solutions… …………………… 4-167
4.4.5 Abnormal image printing and defective roller… …………… 4-209
4.4.6 Other errors… ………………………………………………… 4-212
chapter 5 System diagram

5.1 Block diagram… …………………………………………………… 5-1
5.1.1 Video controller………………………………………………… 5-1
5.1.2 Engin controller … …………………………………………… 5-2
5.1.3 OPE unit………………………………………………………… 5-3
5.1.4 DADF… ………………………………………………………… 5-4
Contents
5.1.5 SCF/HCF… …………………………………………………… 5-5

5.2 Connection diagram………………………………………………… 5-6
5.2.1 Video controller………………………………………………… 5-6
5.2.2 Engin controller … …………………………………………… 5-7
5.2.3 OPE unit………………………………………………………… 5-8
5.2.4 DADF… ………………………………………………………… 5-9
5.2.5 SCF/HCF… …………………………………………………… 5-10
chapter 6 Reference information
6.1 Tool for troubleshooting… ………………………………………… 6-1

6.2 Acronyms and abbreviations… …………………………………… 6-2
6.2.1 Acronyms… …………………………………………………… 6-2
6.2.2 Service parts…………………………………………………… 6-4
6.3 A4 ISO 19798 standard pattern…………………………………… 6-8
6.4 Model information…………………………………………………… 6-13
6.4.1 Understanding for model code… …………………………… 6-13
6.4.2 Understanding material code & name… …………………… 6-14
Precautions
1. Precautions
In order to prevent accidents and damages to the equipment please read the precautions listed below
carefully before servicing the product and follow them closely.
1.1 Safety warning

(1) Only to be serviced by appropriately qualified service technician.
High voltages and lasers inside this product are dangerous. This product should only be serviced by a
qualified service technician.
(2) Use only Samsung replacement parts.

There are no user serviceable parts inside the product. Do not make any unauthorized changes or
additions to the product as these could cause the product to malfunctions and create an electric shocks
or fire hazards.
(3) Laser Safety Statement

The product is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR, chapter 1
Subchapter J for Class 1(1) laser products, and elsewhere, it is certified as a Class I laser product con-
forming to the requirements of IEC 825. Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The
laser system and product are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a
Class I level during normal operation, user maintenance, or prescribed service condition.
Warning >> Never operate or service the product with the protective cover removed from Laser/Scanner
assembly. The reflected beam, although invisible, can damage your eyes.
When using this product, these basic safety pre-cautions should always be followed to reduce
risk of fire, electric shock, and personal injury.
1-1
Service Manual Samsung Electronics
Precautions
1.2 Caution for safety

1.2.1 Toxic material
This product contains toxic materials that could cause illness if ingested.
(1) If the LCD control panel is damaged, it is possible for the liquid inside to leak. This liquid is toxic.
Contact with the skin should be avoided. Wash any splashes from eyes or skin immediately and contact
your doctor. If the liquid gets into the mouth or is swallowed, see a doctor immediately.
(2) Please keep imaging unit and toner cartridge away from children. The toner powder contained in the
imaging unit and toner cartridge may be harmful, and if swallowed, you should contact a doctor.
1.2.2 Electric shock and fire safety precautions

Failure to follow the following instructions could cause electric shock or potentially cause a fire.
(1) Use only the correct voltage, failure to do so could damage the product and potentially cause a fire or
electric shock.
(2) Use only the power cable supplied with the product. Use of an incorrectly specified cable could cause the
cable to overheat and potentially cause a fire.
(3) Do not overload the power socket, this could lead to overheating of the cables inside the wall and could
lead to a fire.
(4) Do not allow water or other liquids to spill into the product, this can cause electric shock. Do not allow
paper clips, pins or other foreign objects to fall into the product, these could cause a short circuit leading
to an electric shock or fire hazard.
(5) Never touch the plugs on either end of the power cable with wet hands, this can cause electric shock.
When servicing the product, remove the power plug from the wall socket.
(6) Use caution when inserting or removing the power connector. When removing the power connector, grip it
firmly and pull. The power connector must be inserted completely, otherwise a poor contact could cause
overheating possibly leading to a fire.
(7) Take care of the power cable. Do not allow it to become twisted, bent sharply around corners or wise
damaged. Do not place objects on top of the power cable. If the power cable is damaged it could overheat
and cause a fire. Exposed cables could cause an electric shock. Replace the damaged power cable
immediately, do not reuse or repair the damaged cable. Some chemicals can attack the coating on the
power cable, weakening the cover or exposing cables causing fire and shock risks.
(8) Ensure that the power sockets and plugs are not cracked or broken in any way. Any such defects should
be repaired immediately. Take care not to cut or damage the power cable or plugs when moving the
machine.
(9) Use caution during thunder or lightning storms. Samsung recommends that this machine be disconnected
from the power source when such weather conditions are expected. Do not touch the machine or the
power cord if it is still connected to the wall socket in these weather conditions.
(10) Avoid damp or dusty areas, install the product in a clean well ventilated location. Do not position the
machine near a humidifier or in front of an air conditioner. Moisture and dust built up inside the machine
can lead to overheating and cause a fire or cause parts to rust.
(11) D o not position the product in direct sunlight. This will cause the temperature inside the product to rise
possibly leading to the product failing to work properly and in extreme conditions could lead to a fire.
(12) Do not insert any metal objects into the machine through the ventilator fan or other part of the casing, it
could make contact with a high voltage conductor inside the machine and cause an electric shock.
1-2
Precautions
1.2.3 Handling precautions

The following instructions are for your own personal safety to avoid injury and so as not to damage the
product.
(1) Ensure the product is installed on a level surface, capable of supporting its weight. Failure to do so could
cause the product to tip or fall.
(2) The product contains many rollers, gears and fans. Take great care to ensure that you do not catch your
fingers, hair or clothing in any of these rotating devices.
(3) Do not place any small metal objects, containers of water, chemicals or other liquids close to the product
which if spilled could get into the machine and cause damage or a shock or fire hazard.
(4) Do not install the machine in areas with high dust or moisture levels, beside on open window or close to a
humidifier or heater. Damage could be caused to the product in such areas.
(5) Do not place candles, burning cigarettes, etc on the product, These could cause a fire.
1.2.4 Assembly / Disassembly precautions

Replace parts carefully and always use Samsung parts. Take care to note the exact location of parts and also
cable routing before dismantling any part of the machine. Ensure all parts and cables are replaced correctly.
Please carry out the following procedures before dismantling the product or replacing any parts.
(1) Check the contents of the machine memory and make a note of any user settings. These will be erased if
the main board or network card is replaced.
(2) Ensure that power is disconnected before servicing or replacing any electrical parts.
(3) Disconnect interface cables and power cables.
(4) Only use approved spare parts. Ensure that part number, product name, any voltage, current or
temperature rating are correct.
(5) When removing or re-fitting any parts do not use excessive force, especially when fitting screws into
plastic.
(6) Take care not to drop any small parts into the machine.
(7) Handling of the OPC Drum
- The OPC Drum can be irreparably damaged if it exposed to light.
Take care not to expose the OPC Drum either to direct sunlight or to fluorescent or incandescent room
lighting. Exposure for as little as 5 minutes can damage the surface of the photoconductive properties
and will result in print quality degradation. Take extra care when servicing the product. Remove the OPC
Drum and store it in a black bag or other lightproof container. Take care when working with the Covers
(especially the top cover) open as light is admitted to the OPC area and can damage the OPC Drum.
- Take care not to scratch the green surface of OPC Drum Unit.
If the green surface of the Drum Cartridge is scratched or touched the print quality will be compromised.
1-3
Precautions
1.2.5 Disregarding this warning may cause bodily injury

(1) Be careful with high temperature components.
The fuser unit works at a high temperature. Use caution when working on the product. Wait for the fuser
to cool down before disassembly.
(2) Do not put finger or hair into the rotating parts.
When operating a product, do not put hand or hair into the rotating parts (Paper feeding entrance, motor,
fan, etc.).
(3) When moving the product :
-W hen transporting/installing the equipment, employ four persons and be sure to hold the lifting handles.
-B e sure not to hold the movable parts or units (e.g. the control panel, DADF) when transporting the
equipment.
-B e sure to use a dedicated outlet with 110V/220V power input.
- The equipment must be grounded for safety.
-S elect a suitable place for installation. Avoid excessive heat, high humidity, dust, vibration and direct
sunlight.
-P rovide proper ventilation since the equipment emits a slight amount of ozone.
- The equipment must be installed near the socket outlet and must be accessible.
-B e sure to fix and plug in the power cable securely after the installation so that no one trips over it.
1-4
Precautions
1.3 ESD precautions

Certain semiconductor devices can be easily damaged by static electricity. Such components are commonly
called “Electrostatically Sensitive (ES) Devices” or ESDs. Examples of typical ESDs are: integrated
circuits,some field effect transistors, and semiconductor “chip” components.
The techniques outlined below should be followed to help reduce the incidence of component damage
caused by static electricity.
Caution >>Be sure no power is applied to the chassis or circuit, and observe all other safety precautions.
1. Immediately before handling a semiconductor component or semiconductor-equipped assembly, drain

off any electrostatic charge on your body by touching a known earth ground. Alternatively, employ a
commercially available wrist strap device, which should be removed for your personal safety reasons prior
to applying power to the unit under test.
2. After removing an electrical assembly equipped with ESDs, place the assembly on a conductive surface,
such as aluminum or copper foil, or conductive foam, to prevent electrostatic charge buildup in the vicinity
of the assembly.
3. Use only a grounded tip soldering iron to solder or desolder ESDs.
4. Use only an “anti-static” solder removal device. Some solder removal devices not classified as “anti-static”
can generate electrical charges sufficient to damage ESDs.
5. Do not use Freon-propelled chemicals. When sprayed, these can generate electrical charges sufficient to
damage ESDs.
6. Do not remove a replacement ESD from its protective packaging until immediately before installing it.
Most replacement ESDs are packaged with all leads shorted together by conductive foam, aluminum foil,
or a comparable conductive material.
7. Immediately before removing the protective shorting material from the leads of a replacement ESD, touch
the protective material to the chassis or circuit assembly into which the device will be installed.
8. Maintain continuous electrical contact between the ESD and the assembly into which it will be installed,
until completely plugged or soldered into the circuit.
9. Minimize bodily motions when handling unpackaged replacement ESDs. Normal motions, such as
the brushing together of clothing fabric and lifting one’s foot from a carpeted floor, can generate static
electricity sufficient to damage an ESD.
1-5
Product Overview
2. Product Overview
2.1 Product Summary
High-Speed Single-Path Color A4 MFP

Document Management Center Machine for Mid & Large Workgroup
■ 38 / 38 ppm Network-ready CMFP

■ 20K/15K Black/Color toner
■ 30K CMYK Imaging unit
■ 100K ITB
■ Machine Life : 1,000K or 5 Years
■ Paper handling
: Maximum 2,720 Sheets Paper Capacity
: Finisher with stapler and offset stacking
: 100sh DADF
■ 160 GB HDD
■ High Performance CCDM
■ Easy to install ( CRU & Option )
■ Color Graphic Touch-Screen LCD
■ Low Cost per Page
■ Direct USB
■ Giga-bit Network
Low Operational Cost Highly Efficient Features

■ High Performance & Fully ■ Document Management &
Featured CMFP with Workflow Solutions
Competitive TCO ■ Device Administrative & Job
Accounting Solutions
Click-Charge Model Ease of Maintenance

■ Click Charge Business model ■ Simple Jam Recovery Features
for Customers ■ Automatic Toner Ordering
■ Additional Reseller Revenue Systems
via Supplies & Service Contract
Ease of Use Durability & Reliability

■ Color Touch Screen UI ■ Durability better than
■ Easy Installable Set & Options Competitions
■ Reliability Comparable to A3
copiers
2-1
Product Overview
Enhanced Features – H/W
Digital Copying Laser Printing

■ Up to 38 cpm(Color/Mono) in A4 ■ Up to 38 ppm(Color/Mono) in A4
■ 1,200 X 1,200 dpi effective output ■ 9600 Digital Image quality
■ 1~999 page multi copy ■ PCL5ce, PCL6, PS3, PDF1.4
■ 500 Sheet Cassette Std. ■ High Speed USB 2.0 & 10/100/1000
■ Max 2,550 Sheets High Capacity base TX Ethernet
■ 100 Sheet Multi Purpose Tray ■ Network Print / Duplex Print
■ 100 Sheet DADF ■ Print Job with HDD(Secure, Delay,
■ 1 Bin Finisher Proof, Job Store)
(Offset Stacker / 50 Sheet Stapler)
■ 2-bin Finisher
(Offset Stacker / 50 Sheet Stapler)
■ 4-Bin Stacker
N/W Color Scanning Fax (Optional)

■ 4,800 x 4,800 dpi ■ 33.6 Kbps modem speed
■ 256 levels gray scale ■ HDD for Fax Memory
■ Duplex Scan ■ Max 100 group dials (Max locations
per 1 Group: 200 locations)
■ Caller ID
■ Color Fax Available
Enhanced Features – S/W
Scan Solution Security

■ Direct Scan to Client ■ Authentication (LDAP)
■ Scan to Email / FTP / SMB / HDD ■ Secure / Confidential Printing
■ SmarThru Workflow (Option)(Scan to ■ IP Address Filtering
Application, OCR, Printer) ■ Time / Date / ID Stamp
Storage Document Management

■ Form Overlay Printing ■ SmarThru Office & SmarThru Workflow
■ e-Form printing ■ Capturing of Stored Document &
■ Font downloading Distributions of Documents
N/W Management Job Accounting

■ SyncThru Web Admin Service ■ Job Records Information (Print/Copy/
■ SyncThru Plug-in Application Scan/Fax)
■ SyncThru Web Service ■ User based History tracking
■ SNMP Job Accounting Access from
SWAS
■ Print/Copy/Scan/Fax log tracking
(HDD, Server)
2-2
Product Overview
2.2 Specifications
2.2.1 General Print Engine
Item Description
Engine Speed Simplex B&W: Up to 38 ppm in A4 (40 ppm in Letter)
Color: Up to 38 ppm in A4 (40 ppm in Letter)
Duplex B&W: Up to 33 ppm in A4 (35 ppm in Letter)
Color: Up to 33 ppm in A4 (35 ppm in Letter)
FPOT (B&W From Ready Less than 14 sec
and Color) From Idle Less than 45 sec(depends on ACR, CTD, or Color tuning, maximum
60 sec.)
From Coldboot Less than 85 sec
Resolution Optical 600 x 600 dpi
Enhanced Up to 9,600 x 600 dpi effective output
Printer Languages PCL5C, PCL6, PostScript Level3, PDF 1.4, KS/KSSM(Only for Korea)
Fonts PCL:45 scalable, 1 bitmap , PS:136
Downloadable Fonts Yes (PCL & PS3 S/W Font)
Print Job Secure Printing Yes(Common for Windows, Linux, Mac)
(with HDD) Delayed Printing Yes(Common for Windows, Linux, Mac)
Proof printing Yes(Common for Windows, Linux, Mac)
Spool Yes(Common for Windows, Linux, Mac)
Job Store Yes(Common for Windows, Linux, Mac)
Form overlays - Max number of overlays can be stored: Up to 100 Form
- Managed in EWS(JMS)
- Multi selection (1st overlay in 1st page, 2nd overlay in 2nd page)
2-3
Product Overview
2.2.2 Controller & S/W
Item Description
Processor MPU SPGPv4 800Mhz
Image Processor SPGPv4 for printing image, CIP6 for scan image, J4e for Engine
DRAM Std. 1280MB (MAIN 1024MB, FIXED 256MB)
Max. 2304MB (Option DDR: 1024MB)
Memory Expansion 1 DDR2 SODIMM Slots (Option Memory: 1024MB DDR2)
Storage(Std.) 160GB HDD
Printer driver Supporting OS [Windows]
- Windows 2000/XP (32/64bit)/2003(32/64bit)/Vista(32/64bit)
[Linux]
- RedHat 8.0 ~ 9.0
- Fedora Core 1~4
- Madrake 9.2 ~ 10.1
- SuSE 8.2 ~ 9.2
[Mac]
- Mac OS X 10.3~10.5
Default Driver PCL6 (For Windows), PS (for Mac, Linux)
Driver feature [Windows]
- Watermark, Overlay, N-up printing, Poster printing
- Duplex, Quality, Color mode (Color, Gray scale)
- Support Color spec., Device color, color management
[Mac/Linux]
- N-up printing, Duplex, Quality
- Color mode (Color, Gray scale)
WHQL Windows 2000/XP(include 64bit)/2003/Vista
Language Localization English, French, German, Italian, Spanish, Korean, Russian,
Brazilian Portuguese
Scan driver TWAIN Yes (N/W and USB)
WIA Yes (USB Only)
Supporting OS [Windows]
- Windows 2000/XP(32/64bit)/2003/Vista(32/64bit)
[Linux]
- RedHat 8 ~ 9
- Fedora Core 1~4
- Madrake 9.2 ~ 10.1
- SuSE 8.2 ~ 9.2
[Mac]
- Mac OS 10.3~10.5
2-4
Product Overview
Item Description
Application Network Scan (Client) Yes
PC-FAX Yes
NW-FAX Yes (Supported through SmarThru Office)
OCR ReadIRIS
Smart Panel Yes (Install default: Windows, Linux, Mac)
Network Management Set IP, SWAS 5.0 & SWS
- Job Accounting, Storage management, Cloning, Remote Install
* Supported Web Browser:

- IE 5.5 or higher
- FireFox 1.5 or higher
- Safari 1.3 or higher
HDD File N/A
Management S/W
SmarThru Smarthru Office v2.0, SmarThru Workflow v2.0 (Workflow is
optional)
Interface Parallel (IEEE 1284) No
USB High-Speed USB 2.0 Host (1Channel)
* Use:
- Option enable Key
- Scan to USB
- USB direct printing
- F/W down load for system upgrade
- Card Reader
Hi-Speed USB 2.0 Peripheral (1Channel)
Wired LAN Ethernet 10/100/1000 Base TX
Foreign Device Optional
Interface (FDI)
Network Network OS [Windows]
Interface - Microsoft Windows
2000/XP(32/64bits)/2003(32/64bits)/Vista(32/64bits)
[Mac]
- Mac OS 10.3~10.5
[Linux]
- RedHat 8 ~ 9
- Fedora Core 1~4
- Madrake 9.2 ~ 10.1
- SuSE 8.2 ~ 9.2
[Novell]
- Netware 5.x, 6.x(TCP/IP Only)
[Others]
- Unix(HP-UX,Solaris,SunOS, SCO)
2-5
Product Overview
Item Description
Protocol * TCP/IP :
TCP/IPv4, HTTP, SNMPv1/v2c/V3, LDAP, SMTP, SSL/TLS,
IPSec
IP Addressing Static IP, Auto IP, BOOTP, DHCP
SNMP/MIB Access Host Resource MIB(RFC 2790), Printer MIB(RFC 3805)
Finisher MIB(RFC(3806), Samsung private MIB, SNMP Trap
User Interface LCD 800 x 480 7 inch TFT WVGA Color graphic LCD with Touch-
Screen, 16bit color
2.2.3 Scan
Item Description
Scan method Color CCDM
Compatibility TWAIN(USB & N/W), WIA(Only for USB)
Color Mode Mono / Gray / Color
Scan Speed B/W (Lineart, 35ipm @ 300dpi (Under P2.8GHz, 512M, USB2.0, 300dpi, Letter)
Halftone)
Gray 35ipm @ 300dpi (Under P2.8GHz, 512M, USB2.0, 300dpi, Letter)
Color 33ipm @ 300dpi (Under P2.8GHz, 512M, USB2.0, 300dpi, Letter)
Resolution Optical 600 x 600ppi
Enhanced 4,800 x 4,800ppi
Halftone 256 levels
Scan Size Max. Document Width Max.216mm(8.5)
Effiective Scan Width Max 208mm(8.2inch)
Max. Document Length Max.356mm (Legal)
Scan Depth Color 24bits
Mono - 1bit for Linearity & Halftone
- 8Bits for Gray scale
Scan-to HDD Yes
USB Yes
Email Yes
Client(NetScan) Yes
SMB Yes
FTP *Color Mode : B/W, Gray, Color
*Format : PDF(Color,Gray,B/W), Single-Tiff,Multi-Tiff (Color,Gray,B/
W), JPEG(Gray,Color)
*Resolution : Color(100,200,300),
Gray(100,200,300),
B/W(100,200,300,400,600)
HTTP(S) No
2-6
Product Overview
2.2.4 Copy
Item Description
Copy Speed Single Document Color Simplex : up to 38 cpm in A4 (40 cpm in Letter)
(DADF) Multiple Copy Mono Simplex: up to 38 cpm in A4 (40 cpm in Letter)
Color Duplex : up to 33 cpm in A4 (35 cpm in Letter)
Mono Duplex : up to 33 cpm in A4 (35 cpm in Letter)
Multiple Color Simplex : up to 33 cpm in A4 (35 cpm in Letter)
Document Mono Simplex: up to 38 cpm in A4 (40 cpm in Letter)
Multiple Copy Color Duplex : up to 16 cpm in A4 (16 cpm in Letter)
Mono Duplex : up to 24 cpm in A4 (25 cpm in Letter)
FCOT From Ready Less than 13 sec
(B&W and Color) From Idle 45 sec ~ 60 sec Max. (depends on ACR, CTD, or Color tuning)
From Coldboot Less than 85 sec
Zoom Range 25% ~ 400% in 1% increments (Platen)
25% ~ 100% in 1% increments (DADF)
Multi Copy 1~999
Original Type Text Platen: Scan 600x600dpi , Printing 600x600dpi
DADF: Scan 300x300dpi, Printing 600x600dpi
Text/Photo Platen: Scan 600x600dpi, Printing 600x600dpi
Megazine Platen: Scan 600x600dpi , Printing 600x600dpi
Photo Platen: Scan 600x600dpi, Printing 1200x1200dpi
Reduce & Enlarge * Zoom Range : 25% to 400% in Platen, 25% to 200% in ADF
* Preset
[Original(100%)]
[Auto Fit]
[A4 → A5(71%)]
[LGL→LTR(78%)]
[LGL→A4(83%)]
[A4→LTR(94%)]
[EXE→LTR(104%)]
[A5 → A4(141%)]
25%, 50%,150%, 200%, 400%
[Custom:25-400%)]
2-7
Product Overview
Item Description
Duplex Copy Using Platen
- 1→1Sided
- 1→2Sided
Using DADF
- 1→1Sided
- 1→2Sided Short,
- 1→2Sided Long,
- 2→1Sided
- 2→1Sided, Rotate Side2
- 2→2Sided
2.2.5 FAX
Item Description
Compatibility ITU-T G3
Communication System PSTN/PABX
Modem Speed 33.6Kbps
TX Speed 3sec (Mono/Standard/ECM-MMR, ITU-T G3 No.1 Chart)
Compression MH/MR/MMR/JBIG/JPEG
Color Fax Yes
ECM Yes
Resolution Std 203*98dpi
(Mono) Fine 203*196dpi
S.Fine Photo 300*300dpi
S.Fine 406*392dpi
Resolution Std 200*200dpi
(Color) Fine 200*200dpi
S.Fine 200*200dpi
Scan speed Std 1.5sec/LTR
Fine 4sec/LTR
S.Fine Depends on Document
2-8
Product Overview
Item Description
Telephone Handset No
Features On hook Dial Yes
Search Yes(Phone Book)
Speed Dial 200 locations
Group Dial Max. 100 Groups (Max. locations per 1 Group : 200 locations)
TAD I/F Yes
Tone/Pulse Yes
Pause Yes
Auto Redial Yes
Last Number Redial Yes
Distinctive Ring Yes
Caller ID Yes (Only for Korea w/ Officeware
Available from October)
External Phone Yes
Interface
Functions Mail Box Yes
Voice Request No
TTI Yes
RTI Yes
Polling Yes
Earth/Recall No
Auto Reduction Yes
SMS No
Multi-send Same as Group Dial Capacity.
Delayed Send Yes
Memory RX Yes
Relay Transmission Yes
(ITU-T Mail Box)
Priority Transmission Yes
Batch Transmission Yes
Report & List Tx/Rx Journal Yes
Print out Confirmation 2 types available (with Image TCR, w/o image TCR,Mono Only)
Auto Dial List Yes
System Data List List all user setting
Sound Control Ring Volume Yes(Off,Low,MED,HIGH)
Key Volume Yes(On,Off)
Speaker Yes(On,Off)
Alarm Volume Yes(On,Off)
2-9
Product Overview
Item Description
Junk Fax barrier Yes
Security Receive Yes
Battery Backup Permanently stored on HDD
Duplex Send Yes
Receive Yes
Receive Mode Fax, TEL, Ans/Fax
FAX Memory HDD Store, 500 Jobs
Fax Forward to FAX Yes(On/Off), both Sent and Received
Fax Forward to e-mail Yes
Broadcasting up to 209 locations
Cover page No
Fax-to HDD Yes
USB No
Fax Yes
Email Yes
Client No
SMB Yes
FTP Yes
HTTP(S) No
2.2.6 Paper Handling
Item Description
Standard Capa. - Tray 1,2,3
500 multi-page for plain paper 80 g/㎡
[20 lb(75 g/㎡) bond 520 sheets]
- MP tray
100 multi-page for plain paper 80 g/㎡
(20 lb bond)
- HCF
1,950 multi-page for plain paper 80 g/㎡
[20 lb(75 g/㎡) bond 2,100 sheets]
Max. Input MP + 3 Tray 1,600 sheets @ 80g/㎡
Capa. MP + 1 Tray + HCF 2,550 sheets @ 80g/㎡
Printing Max. Size 216 x 1,200mm (8.5 x 47.2), Banner zise
Min. Size 98 x 148 mm (3.85x5.83)
Margin(T/B/L/R) 4 mm, 4 mm, 4 mm, 4 mm
2-10
Product Overview
Item Description
Bypass Tray Capacity Plain paper:100 sheets
Transparency:20 sheets
Envelopes:10 sheets
Labels:10 sheets
Media sizes 98 x 148 mm (3.85 x 5.83) ~ 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14)
Banner Size Printing : 216mm x 1,200mm
Media type Printer Default, Plain Paper, Thick Paper, Thin Paper, Bond
Paper, Color Paper, CardStock, Labels, Transparency, Envelope,
Preprinted, Cotton, Recycled Paper, Archive
Media weight 16~58lb (60 to 220g/㎡)
Sensing Paper empty sensor
Standard Capacity 500 sheets @ 80g/㎡
Cassette Media sizes Letter, Legal, Oficio, Folio, A4, JIS B5, ISO B5, Executive, A5,
Tray Statement, A6, PostCard 4x6, Envelope B5, Envelope Monarch,
Envelope COM-10, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope C6,
Custom
Media types Plain Paper, Thin Paper, Bond, Punched, Pre-Printed, Recycled,
Envelope, Transparency, Label, CardStock, Letterhead,Thick,Cotto
n,Colored,Archive
Media weight Plain Paper : 60~90g/㎡(16~24 lb)
Thick Paper : 90~120 g/㎡
Thin Paper : 60g/㎡(16 lb)
Bond : 105~120g/㎡(28~32 lb)
Punched : 60~90g/㎡(16~24 lb)
Pre-Printed : 60~90g/㎡(16~24 lb)
Recycled : 75~90g/㎡(20~24 lb)
Envelope : 75~90g/㎡
Transparency : 138~146g/㎡(16~24 lb)
Label : 120~150g/㎡
CardStock : 120~163g/㎡
Letterhead : 90g/㎡ cotton paper
Sensing H/W Install Detect: Yes
Paper Empty & Low Level Detect: Yes
Paper Type Detect: No
Paper Size Detect: Yes
Optional Capacity 500 sheets @ 80g/㎡
Cassette Media sizes Letter, Legal, Oficio, Folio, A4, JIS B5, ISO B5, Executive, A5,
Tray(SCF) Statement, A6, PostCard 4x6, Envelope B5, Envelope Monarch,
Envelope COM-10, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope C6,
Custom
Envelope, Transparency, Label, CardStock, Letterhead,Thick,Cotto
n,Colored,Archive
2-11
Product Overview
Item Description
Bond : 105~120g/㎡(28~32 lb)
Punched : 60~90g/㎡(16~24 lb)
Recycled : 90~108g/㎡(20~24 lb)
Envelope : 75~90g/㎡
Transparency : 138~146g/㎡
Label : 120~150g/㎡
CardStock : 120~163g/㎡
Paper Empty & Low Level Detect: Yes
Optional, Capacity 1950 sheets @ 80g/㎡
High-Capacity Media sizes A5, A4 to Legal, Folio, Oficio, Exe
Feeder (HCF)
Letterhead
Bond : 105~120g/㎡(28~32 lb)
Punched : 60~90g/㎡(16~24 lb)
Recycled : 75~90g/㎡(20~24 lb)
Paper Level Detect: Yes - Empty, 4 Level
Output Stacking 500 sheets @ 20lb (80g/㎡)
Output Full sensing Yes
1 Bin Finisher Capacity 500 sheets @ 20lb (80g/㎡)
Offset Stacking Yes
Stapling Method 1 Position
Sensing Output Full sensing: Yes
Cartridge Empty Detect : Yes
2-12
Product Overview
Item Description
2 Bin Finisher Capacity FaceUp N/A
FaceDown Main Tray : 500 sheets@20lb (80g/㎡)
Top Tray : 100 sheets @20lb (80g /㎡)
Offset Stacking Yes
Stapling Method 1 Position
Sensing Output Full sensing : Yes
Cartridge Empty Detect : Yes
4 Bin Finisher Capacity FaceUp N/A
FaceDown 400 sheets @ 20lb (80g /㎡) : 100 sheets/Bin
Offset Stacking N/A
Output Full sensing Yes
ADF Capacity 100 sheets ( 20lb, 75 g/㎡)
2-sided Document Yes (Reversing)
Scanning
Document Size Width : 145 ~ 216mm (5.7~8.5)
Length : 145 ~ 356mm (5.7 ~ 14.0) for Single page scan
145 ~ 400mm (5.7 ~ 15.7) for Multi pages scan
Bank Check Scan : 69.6mm x 152.4mm
Document Weight 12.5~28lb
Note : Please use the proper media in the specification table. If not, the print quality problem or the printer
jam will occur.
2-13
Product Overview
2.2.7 Consumables (CRU : Customer Replacement Unit)
Item Description
No. of CRUs K toner : CLX-K8540A
C toner : CLX-C8540A
M toner : CLX-M8540A
Y toner : CLX-Y8540A
K Imaging unit : CLX-R8540K
C Imaging unit : CLX-R8540C
M Imaging unit : CLX-R8540M
Y Imaging unit : CLX-R8540Y
Waste Toner Box : CLX-W8380A
Toner Black Average Continuous Black Cartridge Yield: 20,000* standard pages
Color Average Continuous Black Cartridge Yield: 15,000* standard pages
Key S-CRUM ver 1.1
Life detect Dot count & T/C Sensor
Replace method User replacable
Imaging unit Yield 30,000 pages each CMYK Imaging unit
(OPC+Deve) Key S-CRUM ver 1.1
Sensor page count
Replace method User replacable
Waste Toner Yield 48,000 images
Container Key N/A, Full Sensor
Note
• Declared yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798.

For ISO/IEC 19798 standard pages, refer to section 3 of chapter 6.
• Image counts are based on one color on each page. If you print documents in full color (Yellow, Magenta,
Cyan, Black), the image count will be added by 4 images.
• For more information about the consumables, refer to chapter 3.
2-14
Product Overview
2.2.8 Maintenance Parts (FRU : Field Replacement Unit)
Item Description
No. of FRUs 10 (ITB, Fuser, T2 Roll, Pick-Up, ADF Rubber, DADF Roller,
MPF Rubber, and Guide Exit Unit, Duplex Cover Filter)
CARTRIDGE - TRANSFER 100,000 sheets
ELA UNIT - FUSER 100,000 sheets
MEA UNIT - TR (T2) 100,000 sheets
MEA UNIT - ROLLER PU 100,000 sheets
MEA-HOLDER ADF RUBBER 50,000 sheets
MEA - PICK UP 200,000 sheets
ELA HOU - MP PICK UP 200,000 sheets
MEA UNIT - HOLDER PAD 50,000 sheets
MEA UNIT - EXIT DUPLEX 100,000 sheets
DUPLEX - COVER FILTER 100,000 sheets
Note : If you want to know more information for the consumables, consult the maintenance chapter.
2.2.9 Service & Environment
Item Description
Recommended Printing g 7,000
, sheets/month
/ ((60% Color ratio))
Volume(AMPV)
Max. Monthly Print Volume 16,666 sheets/month
Max Monthly Duty 100,000 sheets/month
MPBF 100,000 sheets
MTTR 60 minutes
Temperature Operating 10~32℃ (50~89.6F)
Storage -20~40℃ (-4~104F)
Humidity Operating 20~80% RH
Storage 10~90% RH
Input Voltage Europe : AC 220-240V(-10%~6%)
USA : AC 110~127V (-10%~6%)
Korea : AC 220-240V(-10%~6%)
Noise Printing 54dB ( Tray 1 & MP : 54dB / With Optional Tray : 56dB /
Simplex / Duplex With Finisher : 58dB )
Copying 56dB ( Tray 1 & MP : 57dB / With Optional Tray : 59dB /
Simplex / Duplex With Finisher : 60dB )
S db
Standby 3d
43dB
Sleep 35dB
2-15
Product Overview
Item Description
Power Ready < 80 Watt
Consumption AVG. < 650 Watt
Max/Peak < 1100 Watt max. / 1500 Watt peak
Sleep/Power Off < 20 Watt / < 1 Watt
2.2.10 Options
Item Model Name Remark

Optional Tray (SCF) SCX-S6555A 2 x 520 sheet Cassette Feeder
Staple SCX-STP000 3 EA x 5000 Staples / package
Memory CLP-MEM400 1024 MB
SmarThru workﬂow SCX-KIT11S Optional Document Management Server S/W
Fax kit SCX-FAX210 Super G3, Analog Fax Kit
Stand SCX-DSK10S Short Type
SCX-DSK10T Tall Type(w/ Cabinet)
FDI SCX-KIT20F Serial Type Foreign Device Interface
Optional Tray (HCF) SCX-HCF100 2,100 sheets High Capacity Feeder
1Bin Finisher SCX-FIN11S Offset Stacking, 50 sheet Stapler, 500 sheet Stacker
2Bin Finisher SCX-FIN20S Finisher Standard Feature + Top Tray 125 sheets
4Bin Mailbox SCX-MBT40S 400 sheets/4bin -> 100 sheets/bin
Note : If you want to know more information for the consumables, consult the Installation chapter.
* Option Compatibility
MFP
SCX-6345N SCX-6555N CLX-8380ND CLX-8540ND
Option
SCX-FIN10S
SCX-FIN11S
SCX-FIN20S
SCX-MBT40S
SCX-FAX210
SCX-S6555A
SCX-HCF100
2-16
Product Overview
2.2.11 Model Comparison
Samsung HP Ricoh Konica Minolta

CLX-8540ND LJ-4730 Aficio MP C2500(A3) Bizhub C252(A3)
Model
Type A4 Tandem A4 Tandem A3 Tandem A3 Tandem
24/24ppm(A4) 24/24ppm(A4)
Speed 38/38ppm(A4) 28/28ppm(A4)
/ 12/12ppm(A3) / 12/12ppm(A3)
FCOT(B/C) 14 sec / 14 sec 10sec / 12sec 6.7sec / 9.7sec 8.4sec / 11.7sec
Emulation PCL6, PS3, PDF1.4 PCL6, PS3, PDF1.4 PCL6, PS3, RPCS PCL6, PS3
Duplex Available (Std)
Scan Res(dpi) 600X600

600X600 600X600 600X600
/ Optical Max / 4800x4800
ADF / Capa DADF /100sht ADF / 50sht DADF /50sht DADF(Opt) /50sht
500sh+MP
500sh + MP 100sh 500sh x2 + MP 100sh
Paper Capa/ 500sh x 3 + MP 100sh 250sh+BP100sh
HCF 1,950sh LCT 1,000sh x2
CST Max 1,600sh LCT 2,500sh
Max 2,550sh Max 3,100sh
Max 3,350sh
HDD 160GB Std 40GB Std 40GB Std 40GB Std
Memory (Max) 1GB / 2GB 448MB / 512MB 1GB 512MB
Interface USB 2.0 , N/W USB 2.0 , N/W USB 2.0 , N/W N/W
Rec. Color
3.6K 5K-9K 4.2K(Expected) 2.1K(Expected)
AMVP
Mo. Duty Cycle 100K 175K 150K 75K
Toner / B20K,C12K /
BK 20K, C15K / 30K B-12K, C-12K / - B-20K, C-15K / 80K
Imaging unit B70K,C45K
2-17
Product Overview
2.3 System Overview
■ Front view
• The symbol * is a mark for the optional device.
1 DADF cover
2 DADF document width guides
3 DADF document input tray
4 DADF document output tray
5 Scanner lid
6 Control panel
7 Side cover
8 Front cover
9 Multi-purpose tray
10 Tray 1
11 Optiona l tray*
12 Stand* 17 Scanner glass
13 CCD Lock 18 Transfer unit
14 Output support 19 Toner cartridge
15 Multi-purpose tray extension 20 Imaging unit
16 Multi-purpose tray paper width guides 21 Waste toner container
2-18
Product Overview
■ Rear view
• The symbol * is a mark for the optional device.
1 Finisher (Stacker & Stapler)* 7 Network port

2 * 8 Dummy for FDI (Foreign Device Interface)*
Finisher output tray (Stacker & Stapler)
3 Finisher cover (Stacker & Stapler)* 9 15-pin Finisher connection (Stacker & Stapler)*
4 Extension telephone socket (EXT)* 10 Power switch
5 * 11
Telephone line socket (LINE) Power receptacle
6 USB port
2-19
Product Overview
■ System Layout
4 5 6
12
3
13
14
7
15
8
16
9
10
11
No. Item No. Item

1 DADF Unit 9 LSU Unit
2 Scanner Unit 10 Standard tray
3 Toner-Cartridge (Y) 11 PSU (Power Supply Unit)
4 Toner-Cartridge (M) 12 Duplex Unit
5 Toner-Cartridge (C) 13 Fuser Unit
6 Toner-Cartridge (K) 14 ACR-Sensor
7 Cartridge Transfer Unit (ITB) 15 Roller Transfer
8 Imaging Unit 16 Multi-purpose tray
2-20
Product Overview
2.3.1 System Configuration
CLX-8540 series consists of Main Control Part, Engine Control Part, Operating Panel Part, Scanner Part,
Line Interface Part, Paper Feeding Part, Image Developing Part, Power Supply Part.
The main controller uses a 800MHz Fereceon Core(ARM V5TE) SPGPv4 chip as a main processor, which
dedicated for printing & Fax functions and for driving several internal operating blocks through system
programs stored in Flash Memory. The engine controller has an independent ARM-based CPU and an
engine control SoC, which includes motor drivers, PWM drivers, LSU drivers, sensors, high-voltage drivers,
and other driving units for mechanical parts.
FUSER UNIT DEVELOPER SYSTEM
FDB HVPS DEVE TONER TOUCH DADF

HV UNIT BOTTLE SCREEN
AC
FUSER ITB DEVE IF TB IF WTB COLOR SCAN IF SCAN

UI PANEL UNIT
SMPS
ENGINE CONTROLLER VIDEO CONTROLLER MSOK
INTERLOCK
SWITCH
CRUM SENSOR LSU DRIVE FEED FINISHER MULTIBIN HDD INTERFACE FAX
UNIT UNIT UNIT
DEVE ACR/CTD POLYGON BLDC CASSETTE STEPLER USB

CRUM MOTOR MOTOR
TB CRUM TONER LD STEP MP NETWORK
CON. MOTOR
ITB CRUM WTB FULL PD DC DUPLEX
MOTOR
TEMP TEMP CLUTCH SCF
SENSOR
HUMIDITY HCF OPTION
ITEMS
< System Diagram >
2-21
Product Overview
2.3.2 H/W Configuration
■ Rear Side View
■ Operation Panel View ■ Left Side View
OP
OP_KEY OP_MAIN PBA KEY
S UB
2-22
Product Overview
2.3.2.1 Video Controller
The Video Controller which is used to control printing, copying, scanning, and FAX functions comprises
a 800MHz Fereceon core (ARM v5TE), an image processor (CIP6) with 256MB SDRAM, 1024MB DDR2
DIMM, Flash memories, SATA HDD interface. The Video controller includes an embedded network that
supports 10/100/1000M Network and also provides USB host 2.0, device. The Video controller board is
connected to the Engine controller with a 80 pin draw connector and communicates with USB interface and
video clock/data. The Scanner Part including DADF & CCD is connected to the Video controller through the
Scan Interface PBA.
! When replacing the Video controller, you must insert the previous MSOK on the new video
controller.
2-23
ROSE_R_VIDEO_V0.2
Service Manual
ENGINE JC92-02192A
IF
S.OFF HDD:160GB OP_MAIN
JC59-00030A JC92-01866A
24V 24V
5V3 5V3
5V2 5V2
5V1 5V1
REGULATOR DC2DC CONV. DC2/DC CONV. DC2DC CONV. DC2/DC CONV. DC2DC CONV.
LD1117DT25 ISL8014 FAN5026MTCX ISL8014 FAN5026MTCX ISL8014
1203-002166 1203-005382 1203-004071 1203-005382 1203-004071 1203-005382
DC2DC CONV. 2.5V 1.8V 1.8V 0.9V 3.3V_BG 1.2V 1.8V 1.0V_BG
ISL8014 1.0V
1203-005382 CPU ICS97ULP DDR2 DIMM IMAGE PROC. DDR2 MEMORY USB2.0
1.1V SPGPv4 1003-001922 B:3709-001494 CIP6 1105-001718 ISP1761
JC13-00045A E:3709-001372 JC13-00044A 0904-002093
Ŷ9LGHR&RQWUROOHU3RZHU'LVWULEXWLRQ
DC2DC CONV. 3.3V 100MHz 2.5V 1.25V 100MHz/HCSL

ISL8014
1203-005382 NW PHY DDR2 MEMORY ICS9FG108
2-24
88E1118 1GB 1003-002192
1205-003298 JC92-02196A
DC2DC CONV.
12MHz
Product Overview
ISL8014
1203-005382 3.3V
FDI
RS232C JC92-01616A
CLOCK GEN. 25Mhz FLASH:32MB USB HUB
CY25811 MX29LV128MT USB2514
1205-002339 1107-001717 0904-002329 SATA HDD
JC59-00030A
CLOCK GEN. IO CONTR. CCDM I/F
CY25811 12Mhz LPEC1 DS90CR218A MASTER_SOK FAX
1205-002339 JC13-00020A 1006-001375 JC92-01802A JC92-01981A
CLOCK GEN. 25Mhz EEPROM:32KB PLD [111]

CY25811 24256 ATF1502 SCAN I/F
1205-002339 1103-001147 1301-001712 JC92-01884A
BATTERY 3.0V RTC RESET IC

M41T00 XC61FN3112MR
CR2032
1206-001026 1203-002233
ROSE HW TEAM
Samsung Electronics
Product Overview
2.3.2.2 Engine Controller
The engine controller of CLX-8540ND comprises an ARM-based CPU (J4E), engine control SoCs (LPEC1
& LPEC3), SDRAM and Flash memories, and other drivers for mechanical elements. The engine controller
manages an electro-photography system, controls the Video Data of printing images from Video Board
to LSU, provides PWMs and control signals for high voltages, adjusts temperature in the fusing system, and
reads sensor signals. The Engine Controller also includes control units for optional SCF(s), HCF and
Finisher.
2-25
Product Overview
■ Engine Controller Power Distribution
2-26
Product Overview
2.3.2.3 DADF Board
The DADF board controls the DADF (Duplex Automatic Document Feeder) unit.
A DADF board controls 2 stepping motors, 2 clutches, 1 solenoid,10 sensors by using a CPU(S3F443FX )
with 80MHz core frequency. A DADF board supports a customer to copy Max 100 sheets of documents
automatically. CLX-8540 series have a DADF module as a default function, and also, the DADF supports up
to 65% of duplex speed.
DUPLEX/SCAN/ REGI
SCAN MOTOR R_STACK
DRIVER EXIT SENSOR SENSOR
GATE EXIT MAIN I/F

MOTOR
MPU:
S3F443FX
HYPER
LENGTH DETECT/WIDTH (DEBUG)
DOWNLOAD
SCAN COVER
MOTOR OPEN
2-27
Product Overview
■ DADF Block Diagram
2-28
Product Overview
2.3.2.4 OPE_Main Board
The OP_main board controls the WVGA(800x600) 7” Color TFT LCD unit, and communicates with Video
controller through USB1.1. The OP_main board is connected with Key & Key_Sub boards which are used for
scan and fax functions.
The OP_main board includes an ARM-based CPU (S3C2413C), a 32MB NOR Flash ROM, a 64MB DDR1
SDRAM memory, and a TSP control unit.
Main IF (power) Main IF (USB) DDR MEMORY MCU (S3C2413)

(64MB)
NOR FLASH
(32MB)
OPE Key sub
LCD Interface
Back Light Unit Touch Screen OPE Key

Debugger JTAG
2-29
Product Overview
2.3.2.5 SMPS Board
SMPS( Switching Mode Power Supply ) board supplies electric power to the engine board and other boards
through a Main-Engine Controller by +5V,+24V from 110V/220V power input. It has safety protection modes
for over current and over load, and it is ready to apply the power-save mode of 1 watt.
INPUT AC (CON1)
OUTPUT 24V1/2/3/4 (CON2)
CONTROL SIGNAL (CON4)
OUTPUT 5V1/2/3 (CON3)
SPECIFICATION • Connection
General Input/Output Voltage 1 INPUT_AC (from Fuser Drive Board)

1) AC 110V (90V ~ 135V)
2) AC 220V (180V ~ 270V) 2 OUTPUT_5V1/2/3 (to Engine PBA)
3) Input Current: 5.0 [Arms] 3 OUTPUT_24V1/2/3/4 (to Engine PBA)
4) Output Power: 335W / Max. 450W
4 SMPS control (from Engine PBA)
DC 5V: 45W ~ 60W
DC 24V: 290W ~ 390W
2-30
Product Overview
◆ Input / Output connector
AC Input Connector( CON1 )

PIN ASSIGN PIN NO Description
1 AC_L
AC Input
2 AC_N
DC Output Connector( CON2 )

Description PIN NO PIN ASSIGN
Power +24V1 1
24V Ground GND 2
Power +24V2 3
24V Ground +GND 4
Power +24V3 5
24V Ground GND 6
Power +24V4 7
24V Ground GND 8
DC Output Connector( CON3 )

Power +5V1 1
5V Ground GND 2
Power +5V2 3
5V Ground GND 4
Signal +5V3 5
5V Ground GND 6
Output Signal Connector( CON4 )

Signal (Reserved)) NC 1
Signal (Reserved) NC 2
Signal (Reserved) NC 3
Signal (24V Remote Sense) 24V 4
Signal (Standby Mode) EN_24V 5
Signal (5V Remote Sense) 5V 6
2-31
Product Overview
2.3.2.6 HVPS Board
CLX-8540ND series have two HVPSs( High Voltage Power Supply), which are denoted by HVPS-L &
HVPS-S.
HVPS (High Voltage Power Supply) Unit is divided to Two PBAs, and generates 15 high-voltage channels
which includes T1(4), T2, MHV(4), DEVE(4), FB, and SP.
HVPS_L (High Voltage Power Supply_Large) supplies High Voltage power to Imaging unit (Charger),
Cartidge transfer unit, T2-roller (T2-Unit).
T2 HVPS 1 (CN1) HVPS 2 (CN2) T1 Y/M/C/K (CN8)
MHV (AC+DC) C/K (CN6)
WTB FULL SENS (CN4)
FAN_LSU (CN3)
MHV (AC+DC) Y/M

(CN5)
2-32
Product Overview
HVPS_S (High Voltage Power Supply_Small) supplies High Voltage power to Imaging unit (Developer),
Fuser, Saw-plate (T2-Unit).
SAWPLATE (CN3) FUSER BIAS (CN4) HVPS 3 (CN5) DEVE Y/M/C/K (CN2)
• Specification
Rated Output Load

Channel AC/DC No. Type Control Output
Load Range Range
DC- Constant-V PWM Duty -701 V 0 ~ -1800 V
MHV 4 250 pF 0.1~3 mA
AC - PWM Duty 1.6 KVpp 1.0 ~ 3.2 Vpp
DEVE DC- 4 Constant-V PWM Duty 400 MΩ -525 V 0 ~ -800 V 0 ~ 30 uA
T1 DC+ 4 Constant-I PWM Duty 90 MΩ 10.4 uA 0 ~ 40 uA 0 ~ 3.5 KV
DC+ Constant-I PWM Duty 100 MΩ 19 uA 0 ~ 50 uA 0 ~ 6.5 KV
T2 1
DC- Constant-V Volume 20 MΩ -500 V - 0 ~ 20 uA
Saw Plate DC- 1 Constant-V PWM Duty NO -453 V 0 ~ -2.4 KV 0 ~ 40 uA
DC+ PWM Duty NO 506V 0 ~ 1.5 KV 0 ~ 20 uA
Fuser Bias 1 Constant-V
DC- Volume NO -830 V - 0 ~ 20 uA
• Constant current outputs in T1/T2 channels.

• Individual T1 channels for each color.
• Alternative DC +/- outputs between image & non-image periods in T2.
• AC + DC MHV Bias.
• Rated loads in all channels could be change according to the environmental conditions.
• All output channels can be adjusted by using volume control components.
2-33
Product Overview
2.3.2.7 Fuser Drive Board
The FDB (Fuser Drive Board) controls 2 halogen lamps in the fuser unit using control signals which are
provided from the ENGINE PBA and supplies AC power to the SMPS. Both V1/V2 FDBs provide max.
1500W output power.
When the phase signal of AC Power goes to zero, the FDB sends a zero-crossing detect signal to the
ENGINE PBA. The zero-crossing output consists an open-collector node.
1
4
VARISTOR FUSE PHOTO TRAIC HEAT SINK
• Connection
1 INLET AC
2 FUSER CONTROL (from Main board)
3 FUSER AC (to Fuser lamp)
4 SMPS AC ( to SMPS)
• Specification
V1 V2
Input Voltage AC 110V AC 220V
(Range) (90 ~ 135V) (180 ~ 270V)
Input Current 20A 10A
Output Power Max. 1500W Max. 1500W
Phase Detect Zero-Crossing Detect
(Open Collector Output)
Protection Relay Control Signal
2-34
Product Overview
2.3.2.8 Finisher Board
The finisher board controls an optional finisher in CLX-8540ND. The finisher board consists a controller
(S3F443FX), two motor drive ICs to control feeding timing, and a LPEC1 for expanding control I/Os. An
UART port is also used to communicate between the Main-Engine board and the finisher board.
Finisher Interface Cable Printer
# FIN_DETECT 1 1 FIN_DETECT #
# RxD 2 2 TxD #
# TxD 3 3 RxD #
# nFIN_RESET 4 4 nFIN_RESET #
N.C. 5 5 N.C.
+5V 6 6 +5V
+3.3V 7 7 +3.3V
+24V 8 8 +24V
+24V 9 9 +24V
+24V 10 10 +24V
GND(3.3/5V Power) 11 11 GND(3.3/5V Power)
GND(3.3/5V Power) 12 12 GND(3.3/5V Power)
GND(24V Power) 13 13 GND(24V Power)
FG(Case)
FG(Case) Connector 3Ways Connector 3Ways

D-Sub 15P. Male D-Sub 15P. Female
# : TTL Level (3.3V )
2-35
Product Overview
2.3.2.9 SCF/HCF board
The SCF board is utilized to control an optional cassette in CLX -8540ND. Max 2 cassettes can be connected
under the default cassette in order to increase paper capacity. The SCF board consists a controller
(S3F443FX) and two motor drive ICs to control feeding timing. An UART port is used to communicate
between the Main-Engine controller and the SCF board. The board is also used in a HCF. Because key
functions of SCF and HCF are the same, SCFs and HCF can be used the same boards.
No. Signal Name Direction Active Level Description

1 24V POWER - +24V Power
2 3.3V POWER - +3.3V Power
3 GND POWER - Signal Ground
4 TxD OUT - Data Transmission
5 RxD IN - Data Receive
6 nBUSY OUT LOW SCF TxD Line Busy
7 nCMDREQ OUT LOW Command Request
8 Reserved1 I/O LOW Reserved
9 Reserved2 I/O LOW Reserved
2-36
Product Overview
2.3.2.10 FAX Board
• Specifications
- LINE CONNECTION: PSTN or PABX (RJ-11)

- Compatibility: ITU-T G3, Super G3
- Communication System: PSTN/PABX
- Modem Speed: 33.6Kbps
- TX Speed: 3 sec
*S tandard Resolution, MMR, 33,6Kbps
* Phase “C” by ITU-T No.1 Chart in Memory transmission with ECM
- Scan Speed
Platen -> 2 sec / A4
ADF -> 5.5 sec / A4
* Scan time: 2 sec/A4 @ 203x98dpi
* Scan setup time : 3.5 sec
- Receive Mode: Fax, TEL, ANS/FAX
- Compression: MH/MR/MMR/JBIG/JPEG
- ECM: Yes
- Resolution S td: 203*98dpi
Fine: 203*196dpi
S.Fine: 203x392dpi, 300*300dpi, 406x392dpi
- Contrast: Adsustable 5 levels
- Fax Memory: 32MB (in HDD)
2-37
Product Overview
• Serial & Parallel Types
How to connect a serial fax first.
1) connect a line cord into Line RJ11.

2) Connect 2’nd phone by 4 line cord.
How to connect Parallel Fax
1) Connect a line cord into Line RJ11.

2) Just connect a phone to External RJ11.
2-38
Product Overview
2.3.2.11 Other PBAs
DEVE CRUM PBA ERASER_LAMP_PBA
Finisher IF PBA SCAN_IF_PBA
2-39
Product Overview
2.3.3 Mechanic Configuration
2.3.3.1 Feeding Section
1) Cassette
It stores and automatically feeds printing papers.

he pick-up roller picks up printing papers, feeds papers, and also, it removes static electricity, and so on.
T
> Spec.
* Feeding Method : Cassette Type
* Feeding Standard : Center Loading
* Feeding Capacity : Cassette 500 Sheets
(80g/㎡, 21lb Paper Standard) Manual Feeder
* Paper Detecting Sensor : Photo Sensor
(Empty, Registration, Exit)
* Paper Size Sensor : None
* Paper type
: Plain (60~90 g/㎡), envelope (75~90 g/㎡),
Label (120~150 g/㎡), Cardstock (120~130 g/㎡),
transparency (138~146 g/㎡) , Thick (90~120 g/㎡)
2) SCF (Second Cassette Feeder ) / HCF ( High Capacity Feeder)
CF & HCF additionally store and automatically feed printing papers. Their functions are the same as the
S
first cassette tray.
> Spec.
* Paper Direction : FISO (Front-in, Side-Out)
* Cassette Type : A4, Ltr
* Paper Discharge : Separation Claw
* Capacity
SCF : 500 Sheets (Standard paper 80g/㎡ 21lb)
HCF : 1950 Sheets (Standard paper 80g/㎡ 21lb)
* Paper Size : A4, Letter
* Paper Weight (average) : 60~90g/㎡ (16~24lbs)
* Additional Function : Paper Empty Sensor
Paper Registration Sensor
Paper Exit Sensor HCF
* Paper Type
-S CF : P
lain (60~90 g/㎡), envelope (75~90 g/㎡), Label (120~150 g/㎡), Cardstock (120~130 g/㎡),
transparency (138~146 g/㎡), Thick (90~120 g/㎡)
- HCF : Plain (60~90 g/㎡), Thick (90~120 g/㎡)
2-40
Product Overview
2.3.3.2 Drive Unit
There are several different motors including BLDC, stepping, and DC motors.
- Main Motor is for Paper path( Pick-up, Feed, Registration and MPF) and Cartridge Transfer Unit.
- BK Motor is for Black OPC and Black DEVE
- Color OPC Motor is for Color OPC (Yellow, Magenta, Cyan)
- Color DEVE Motor is for Color DEVE (Yellow, Magenta, Cyan)
- Fuser Motor is for Fuser and Exit roller
- Duplex Motor is for Duplex feeding
- Exit Motor is for stable stacking
- Toner Supply Motors are for toner supply from toner bottles to imaging units.
Main Motor
Color OPC Motor
BK Motor
Color DEVE Motor
Duplex Motor
Exit Motor
Fuser Motor
Toner Supply Motor

(4EA)
2-41
Product Overview
2.3.3.3 LSU ( Laser scanning unit )
LSU consists of LD(Laser Diode) and polygon motor control part. For realizing Color Image, it is controlled
by 4 LDs. When the controller generates the printing image signal, LD will turn on and Polygon motor starts.
If the receiving part in LSU detect the beam , Hsync is generated. When the polygon motor is rotated with a
steady speed, it is time of LSU ready status for printing.
OPC Drum
Photo Diode
Polygon Mirror
Polygon Motor
LD Driver circit Motor Driver
LD(Laser Diode)
Protector panel
Y M C K
2-42
Product Overview
2.3.3.4 Fuser Unit
The fuser unit consists of dual heat lamp, heat roller, pressure roller, fuser belt, two thermostats and
a thermistor. The fuser unit melts and fuses the toner, onto the paper, by applying pressure and high
temperature to complete a printing job.
- Fusing Type : [Dual Lamp Heating, 700W/500W]

- Heat Roller :[ø18 ]
- Pressure Roller : [ø29 electrically conductive]
- Thermistor – Temperature Detecting Sensor
contact thermistor 2EA
- Thermostat – Overheat Protection Device
- Fuser Bias : 700V(HH), 500V(LL,NN)on the P/R tube
① Thermostat
W hen a heat lamp is overheated, a Thermostat cuts off the main power to prevent over-heating.
- Non-Cotact type Thermostat
② Heat roller
The heat roller transfers the heat from the lamp to the belt. The surface of a heat roller is coated with
Dickel coating, so toner does not stick to the surface.
③ Pressure roller
A pressure roller mounted under a heat roller is made of a silicon resin, and the surface also is coated with
Teflon. When a paper passes between a heat roller and a pressure roller, toner adheres to the surface of
a paper permanently.
2-43
Product Overview
- Fuser Error
　 OPEN Heat LOW Heat OVER Heat

Warm-Up Less than 60℃ Less than Warm Up Ref. Temp Higher than 230℃(240℃) &For
at more than 20 -20℃ & for more than 30 seconds continuous 30 seconds(5 sec)
seconds. (LL) / 25s (except for LL) in Warm
Up end time.
Stand-Byor N/A Less than Stand-By Ref. Temp - Higher than 230℃(240℃) & For
Recoverable -40℃ & For more than 10 seconds. continuous 30 seconds(5 sec)
Error State for - Higher than 216℃ & for more
Over Heat only than 3 min.
Printing N/A Less than Printing Ref. Temp Higher than 230℃(240℃) & For
-35℃ & For more than 10 seconds. continuous 30 seconds(5 sec)
Power Save N/A N/A Higher than 230℃(240℃) & For
continuous 30 seconds(5 sec)
Low Power N/A N/A Higher than 230℃(240℃) & For
Other N/A N/A Higher than 230℃(240℃) & For
2-44
Product Overview
2.3.3.5 Scanner
2.3.3.5.1 Scanning Technology
1) Color Separation : Single-Pass color separation

C olor separation is done with transmissive color filters put over the CCD elements themselves as part of
CCD manufacturing process. The CCD used in CLX-8540ND Series has three rows of imaging elements.
Each row has a color filter directly over the CCD elements, one row red, one green, and one blue.

2) Image Signal Input :
The output signal of CCD is designed for being ADC in S4L9335X through Bypass-Cap, and then
processing through the Signal which is defined between S4L9335X and CIP4.
It uses CDS (Correlated Double Sampling) which implement double Sampling for black level and image by
using signal of CIP4E, when AFE receives each pixels.

3) Image Processor :
It reads pixel data of CCD (Charge Coupled Device) by 600dpi Line, and in accordance with the mode set
from CIP4, said data is experiencing Error Diffusion Algorithm in mode or stored at Scan Buffer through
DMA without Halftoning Algorithm in PC Scan mode. At this time, both above modes conduct processing
after Shading Correction and Gamma Correction.

4) Optical System: Lens Reduction type All-In-One( Scanning Lamp + Lens + CCD Image sensor)

5) Light Source : Xenon Lamp

6) Scanning method
- Platen : Optical Moving
- DADF: Document Moving
2-45
Product Overview
2.3.3.5.2 Scanning Area
Maximum Document Width : 216mm

Effective Scanning Width: 208mm
Minimum Scan Width : 1” (25.4mm)
Minimum Scan Length : 1” (25.4mm)
a b c d
2mm ± 2mm 2mm ± 2mm 3mm ± 1mm 3mm ± 1mm
Effective Scanning width
a
Effective Scanning length
c d
2.3.3.5.3 Source Document Specification (DADF)
The machine with this feature scans both sides of a paper.
• Spec
Capacity : Up to 100 sheets 75 g/m²
Copy speed : simplex 38cpm(LTR)/ duplex 25cpm(LTR)
Document Size : W idth : 148 to 216 mm
Length : 145 to 356 mm for single page scan
145 to 400 mm for multi pages scan
Document Size Sensing Yes Extendible tray for long documents Yes
Adjustable Paper Guide Yes DADF Ready Indicator None
Labels w/graphics None Book copying with DADF open Yes
Wear out items (rolls) easily No Wear out items (rolls) should be DADF Pad &
replaceable w/o tools serviced. Feed Roller
2-46
Product Overview
• Layout
f g
b
h
e
d k
i j
c ⓙ
INDEX Description Qty Remark

MOTOR 2
ELECTRONIC CLUTCH 2
SOLENOID 1
PHOTO SENSOR 7 To detect Paper size
GATE 2
3 steps GATE 1
Document Path
SIMPLEX ⓐ→ⓑ→ⓒ→ⓓ→ⓔ
DUPLEX ⓐ → ⓑ → ⓒ → ⓕ → ⓖ → ⓗ → ⓒ → ⓘ → ⓙ → ⓚ→ ⓔ
2-47
Product Overview
2.3.3.6 Sensor
③ Exit Sensor
①Bin Full Sensor
④ Duplex Jam
⑥ Duplex Ready
⑧ Paper Limit ② Regi Sensor
⑤ Paper Empty Sensor ⑪ Feed Sensor
⑩ MPF Empty Sensor

⑦ Cassette Detect
⑨ Power Low Sensor
■ DESCRIPTION
① Bin Full Sensor : Check overflowing of Paper on Stacker

② Regi Sensor : Two Regi Sensor for checking precise paper position
③ Exit Sensor : Check paper position on Fuser
④ Duplex Jam : Check paper position on Duplex path1
⑤ Paper Empty Sensor : Check Paper empty on a cassette
⑥ Duplex Ready : Check paper ready on Duplex path
⑦ Cassette Detect : Check cassette insertion
⑧ Paper Limit : Check raising paper up to feeding position
⑨ Paper Low Sensor : Check the number of paper below 100 pages
⑩ MPF Empty Sensor : Check paper empty on MPF
2-48
Product Overview
2.3.3.7 Sensor ( Expansion)
59
55
56/57
58
54
50 53
52
51
49 46/47
48
8
11
13
12
18
14 19/20
41/42/43/44
25/26/27
23
29 24
37/38/39/40 45
22
21
33/34/35/36 10
30
9
7
31 4
6
15/16/17
5
28
3
32
1 2
2-49
Product Overview
No Sensor Name Unit SEC Code Sensor Type

1 CASSETTE_DETECT BASE_FRAME 0604-001095 Photo Interrupter
2 PAPER_NEAR_END BASE_FRAME 0604-001095 Photo Interrupter
3 PAPER_UP_LIMIT BASE_FRAME 0604-001096 Photo Interrupter
4 CASSETTE_EMPTY BASE_FRAME 0604-001095 Photo Interrupter
5 MP_EMPTY BASE_FRAME 0604-001095 Photo Interrupter
6 SENS_DUPLEX_READY FRAME 0604-001095 Photo Interrupter
7 SENS_FEED FRAME 0604-001230 Reflective Photo Interrupter
8 SENS_COVER OPEN FRAME JC39-00750A interlock s/w
9 SENS_COVER OPEN FRAME JC39-00751A interlock s/w
10 SENS_REGI FRAME 0604-001230 Reflective Photo Interrupter
11 SENS_PAPER_EXIT FRAME 0604-001095 Photo Interrupter
12 SENS_DUPLEX_JAM SIDE 0604-001095 Photo Interrupter
13 OUTBIN_FULL FRAME 0604-001095 Photo Interrupter
14 FINISHER_DETECT FRAME 0604-001095 Photo Interrupter
15/16/17 PAPER_SIZE1(2/3) CASSETTE JC92-01913A TACT SWITCH
18 THERMOSTAT FUSER 4712-001028 SPST, NORMALLY CLOSED TYPE
19/20 FUSER_THERM1(2) FUSER 1404-001355 THERMISTOR
21 OPC_BK_HOME FRAME 0604-001095 Photo Interrupter
22 OPC_CR_HOME FRAME 0604-001095 Photo Interrupter
23 SENS_T1_ENGAGE FRAME 0604-001095 Photo Interrupter
24 SENS_T2_ENGAGE FRAME 0604-001095 Photo Interrupter
25 SENS_CTD FRAME JC32-00006A ACR/CTD SENSOR
26/27 SENS_ACR1(2) FRAME JC32-00006A ACR/CTD SENSOR
28 SENS_LSU_CLN FRAME 0604-001095 Photo Interrupter
29 INNER_TEMP FRAME 1404-001417 THERMISTOR
30 OUT_TEMP HUMIDITY S FRAME JC32-00005A Temp/Humidity sensor
31 WASTE_FULL FRAME JC96-04546A Beam Sensor
32 SENS_WTB_MOT FRAME JC92-02005A Photo Interrupter
33/34/35/36 SENS_TC_Y(M/C/K) DEVE JC32-00008A
37/38/39/40 CRUM_DEVE_Y(M/C/K) DEVE JC92-02032A S-CRUM
41/42/43/44 CRUM_TB_Y(M/C/K) TB JC92-02032B S-CRUM
45 CRUM_ITB ITB JC92-01857A S-CRUM
46/47 AUTO_PAPER_SIZE(2) SCAN 0604-001370 Multi Beam Sensor
48 CCD HOME SENSOR SCAN 0604-001095 Photo Interrupter
49 PLATEN_COVER_OPEN SCAN 0604-001095 Photo Interrupter
50 SENS_DOC_SCAN DADF 0604-001095 Photo Interrupter
51 SENS_DOC_GATE DADF 0604-001095 Photo Interrupter
52 SENS_R_STACK DADF 0604-001095 Photo Interrupter
53 SENS_GATE_HP DADF 0604-001095 Photo Interrupter
54 SENS_DOC_DUPLEX DADF 0604-001095 Photo Interrupter
55 SENS_DOC_REGI DADF 0604-001095 Photo Interrupter
56 SENS_DOC_WIDTH DADF 0604-001095 Photo Interrupter
57 SENS_DOC_DETECT DADF 0604-001095 Photo Interrupter
58 SENS_DOC_LENGTH DADF 0604-001095 Photo Interrupter
59 DADF_COVER_OPEN DADF 0604-001095 Photo Interrupter
2-50
Product Overview
2.3.3.8 Motor & Fan
The printer has ten motors and four fans. The figure below shows the locations of the motors and fans.
M2
M3
M8
M1
F3
M12
M7 M11
F2 F4
M4
M6 M5
F1
M9
M10
NAME FUNCTION NAME FUNCTION

M1 FUSER DRIVE BLDC MOTOR M9 LSU CLEANING DC MOTOR
M2 EXIT DRIVE STEPPING MOTOR M10 WASTE TONER BOTTLE DRIVE DC
MOTOR
M3 DUPLEX DRIVE STEPPING MOTOR M11
M4 MAIN DRIVE BLDC MOTOR M12
M5 BLACK OPC & DEVE DRIVE BLDC F1 FAN-DC : HVPS
MOTOR
M6 COLOR DEVE DRIVE BLDC MOTOR F2 FAN DC INVERTER : SMPS
M7 COLOR OPC DRIVE BLDC MOTOR F3 FAN DC : DUPLEX
M8 TONER SUPPLY DRIVE DC MOTOR F4 FAN DC : DUPLEX
2-51
Product Overview
2.3.4 Control panel
2.3.4.1 Overview
1 Machine Setup: Leads you to the machine setup and advanced settings.
2 Job Status: Shows the jobs currently running, queued jobs or completed jobs.
3 Status: Shows the status of your machine.
4 Display screen: Displays the current machine status and prompts during an operation.
You can set menus easily using the touch screen.
5 Numeric keypad: Dials fax number, and enters the number value for document copies or other options.
6 Clear: Deletes characters in the edit area.

7 Redial/Pause: In standby mode, redials the last number, or
in edit mode, inserts a pause into a fax number.
8 On Hook Dial: Engages the telephone line.
9 Interrupt: Stops a job in process to do an urgent copy job.
10 Clear All: Reverts the current settings to the default values.
11 Power Saver: Sends the machine into the power saver mode.
You can also turn the power on and off with this button.
12 Stop: Stops an operation at any time. The pop up window
appears on the screen showing the current job that the
user can stop or resume.
13 Start: Starts a job.
2-52
Product Overview
2.3.4.2 Introducing the touch screen and useful buttons
Touch screen Machine Setup button
The touch screen allows for user-friendly operation When you press Machine Setup button, you
of the machine. Once you press the home icon can browse current machine settings or change
( ) on the screen, it shows the Main screen. machine values.
• This button allows you to move to Copy, Fax,

• : Shows Help. You can find the explanation by Scan, Stored Documents menu directly.
feature contents. • Machine Status: Shows the current status of the
• Copy: Enters the Copy menu. machine.
• Fax: Enters the Fax menu. (Optional) • Admin Setting: Allows an administrator to set up
• Scan: Enters Scan to Email, Scan To PC, Scan to the machine.
Server menu. • Usage Page Report:You can print the report on
• Stored Documents: Enters the Stored Documents the amount of printouts depending on the paper
menu. size and type.
• USB: When USB memory is inserted into the USB • Tray Management: You can change current
memory port on your machine, USB icon shows tray setting such as paper size and paper type.
on the display screen. Monitor current tray status as well.
• SmarThru Workflow: Enters the SmarThru
Workflow menu.
(Optional)
• Toner Info.: Shows amount of toner used.
• LCD Brightness: Adjusts the brightness of the
touch screen.
• : You can change the display language.
• : Guides you to remove the USB memory
devices from the machine. Follow the instruction
on the LCD. This icon appears only when you
connect an USB memory module.
• Logout: Logs out from the currently logged in
account.
2-53
Product Overview
Job Status button Power Saver button
When you press Job Status button, the screen When the machine is not in use, save electricity
shows the lists of currently running jobs, queued with the provided power save mode. Pressing this
jobs and completed jobs. button puts the machine into power save mode.
If you press Power Saver button for more than two
seconds, a window appears, requesting that you
turn the power off. If you choose Yes, the power is
turned off.
This button can also be used to turn the button on.
Status Description
Off • The machine is not in the power
save mode.
• The machine is in the low power
save mode.
• Current Job tab: Shows the list of jobs in progress
and pending. Blue On machine is in the power save mode.
• Completed Job tab: Provides the list of completed Blink The machine is in the ready power
jobs. save mode.
• Active Notice tab: Displays any error codes that
have occurred.
• No.: Gives the order of jobs.
• Job Name: Shows job information like name and Interrupt button
type.
• Status: Gives the current status of each job. When you press Interrupt button, the machine goes
• User: Provides user name, mainly computer into interrupt mode which means it stops a printing
name. job for urgent copy job. When the urgent copy job
• Job Type: Displays details of the active job, such completes, the previous printing job continues.
as job type, recipient phone number and other
information.
Status Description
• Detail: Shows the detailed information of the
selected option on the Current Job, Completed Off The machine is not in interrupt
Job and Active Notice list. printing mode.
• Delete: Removes the selected job from the list.
Blue On The machine is in interrupt printing
• Delete All: Removes all the jobs from the list.
• Close: Closes the job status window and switches mode.
to previous view.
2-54
Product Overview
2.3.4.3 Understanding the Status LED
When the problem occurs, the Status LED indicates the machine’s condition by the light color of it’s action.
• Status
Status Description
Off • The machine is off-line.
• The machine is in power save mode. When data is received, or any
button is pressed, it switches to on-line automatically.
Green On The machine is on-line and can be used.
Blinking • When the backlight slowly blinks, the machine is receiving data from the
computer.
• When the backlight blinks rapidly, the machine is printing data.
Red On • The imaging unit is totally out of lifespan.
Remove the old imaging unit and install a new one.
• The toner cartridge is totally empty. Remove the old toner cartridge and
install a new one.
• A paper jam has occurred.
• The cover is opened. Close the cover.
• There is no paper in the tray. Load paper in the tray.
• The machine has stopped due to a major error. Check the display
message.
• The waste toner container not installated in the machine, or full waste
toner container.
Blinking • A minor error has occurred and the machine is waiting the error to be
cleared. Check the display message. When the problem is cleared, the
machine resumes.
• The toner cartridge is near the end of its life.
Order a new toner cartridge. You can temporarily improve print quality by
redistributing the toner.
2-55
Product Overview
2.3.5 Graphic user interface overview
2.3.5.1 Menu Map
The control panel provides access to various menus to set up the machine or use the machine’s functions.
These menus can be accessed by pressing Machine Setup, Job Status or touching menus on the
display screen. Refer to the following diagram.
Main screen
The Main screen is shown on the display screen on the control panel.
Some menus are grayed out depending on your model.
Copy Fax (Optional) Documents Box

Basic tab Basic tab User Box tab
Original Size Address Book Add
Reduce/Enl arge Duplex Delete
Dupl ex Resolut ion Edit
Output Advanced tab Detail
Original Type Original Size Search
Color Mode Delay Send Enter
Advanced tab Priority Send Syst em Box tab
ID Copy Polling Detail
N-Up Mailbox Enter
Poster Copy Image tab
Clone Copy Original Type
Book C opy Darkn ess
Bookl et Erase Backgrou nd
Covers Color Mode
Transparenci es
WaterMark
Overl ay
Aut oCrop
Multi-Bin
Image tab
Erase Edge
Erase Back ground
Margin Shift
Scan Enhance
Adj ust B acksi de
Image
USB (Optional) Scan to Email Scan to Server

USB Format From tab Basic tab
USB Print To tab Advanced tab
Scan to USB Cc tab Image tab
Basic tab Bcc tab Output tab
Advanced tab Subj ect tab
Image tab Message tab
Output tab Options tab
Scan to PC Scan to USB Machine Status

Basic tab Basic tab Suppli es Li fe tab
Advanced tab Advanced tab Machi ne Info. tab
Image tab Image tab
Output tab Outpu t tab
Admin Setting Tray Management Usage Page Report

General tab Tray Suppli es Li fe
Setup tab MP Tray Machi ne Info.
Print/Report tab Tray2
Tray3
2-56
Product Overview
Machine Setup button
When you press the Machine Setup button on the control panel, the screen displays three menus. Machine
Status shows the supplies life, billing, counters and reports. Admin Setting lets you set the advanced
setup to use your machine in depth and conveniently. Usage Page Report can print the report on the amount
of printouts depending on the paper size and type.
Machine Status
Supplies Life tab Machine Info. tab
Toner Cartridge-C Machine Details

Toner Cartridge-M Customer Support
Toner Cartridge-Y Machine Serial Number
Toner Cartridge-K IP Address
Imaging Unit-C Hardware Options
Imaging Unit-M Configuration
Imaging Unit-Y Software Versions
Imaging Unit-K Tray Status
Fuser Kit Tray
Feed Roller Kit-Tray 1 Status
Feed Roller Kit-Tray 2 Paper Size
Feed Roller Kit-Tray 3 Paper Type
Feed Roller Kit - Bypass Tray Print/Report
Document Feeder Roller System Report
BTR Kit Scan Report
DADF Friction Pad Kit Fax Report
Usage Counters
Total Impressions
Black Impressions
Black Copied Impressions
Black Printed Impressions
Color Impressions
Color Copied Impressions
Color Printed Impressions
Sheets
Copied Sheets
Black Copied Sheets
Color Copied Sheets
Printed Sheets
Black Printed Sheets
Color Printed Sheets
2 Sided Sheets
Copied 2 Sided Sheets
Black Copied 2-Sided Sheets
Color Copied 2-Sided Sheets
DADF Scan Page Counts
Platen Scan Page Counts
Printed 2 Sided Sheets
Black Printed 2-Sided Sheets
Color Printed 2-Sided Sheets
Analog Fax Sheets
Analog Fax 2-Sided Sheets
Fax Image Received
Analog Fax Images Sent
Analog Fax Images Received
Images Sent
Network Scanning Images Sent
Email Images Sent
Maintenance Impressions
Black Maintenance Impressions
2-57
Product Overview
Admin Setting
General tab Setup tab
Device Info Copy Setup

Date & Time Fax Setup
Default Settings Network Setup
Measurement Authentication
Timers Optional Service
Language Color
Power Saver
Tray Management
Altitude Adjustment
Output Options
Contention Management
Sound
Supplies Management
Machine Test
On Demand Overwrite
HDD Spoolling
Stored Job File Policy
Country Print/Report tab
Print
Accounting Reports
Report
Current Job tab Completed Job tab

Detail Detail
Delete Close
Delete All
Close
Active Notice tab

Detail
Close
2-58
Product Overview
2.3.5.2 Understanding the Copy screen
When you press Copy on the Main screen, the Copy screen appears which has several tabs and lost of
copying options. All the options are grouped by features so that you can configure your selections easily. If
the screen displays an other menu, press Home button to go to the Main screen. If you want to know more
information for copy screen, please consult the user manual.
Basic Tab
• Original Size : Selects the size of the originals.

• Reduce/Enlarge : Reduces or enlarges the size of a copied image.
• Duplex : Sets the machine to print copies on both sides of the paper.
• Output : Selects Collated or Uncollated copy options. If you install the optional stacker & stapler, then the
staple related option appears.
• Text, Text/Photo, Photo, Magazine : Improves the copy quality by selecting the document type for the
current copy job.
• Color, B/W, Auto : You can switch this copy mode among Color mode, B/W mode, Auto mode.
Selects whether the user print copies in mono or color.
• Light, Dark : Adjusts the brightness level to make a copy that is easier to read, when the original contains
faint markings and dark images.
• Paper Supply : Selects the paper supply tray.
• Erase Edge : Allows you to erase punch holes, staple marks, and fold creases along any of the four
documents edges.
• Erase Background : Prints an image with no background.
• Margin Shift : Creates a binding edge for the document.
• Scan Enhance : Use this feature for the better quality of copyoutput.
• More : You can change the setting value for each menu.
2-59
Product Overview
Advanced Tab
• ID Copy: Prints 2-sided originals on one sheet of paper. This feature is helpful for copying a small-sized
item, such as a business card.
• N-Up: Prints 2 or 4 original images, reduced to fit onto one sheet of paper.
• Poster Copy: Prints a large image into divided 9 pages.
• Clone Copy: Prints multiple image copies from the original document on a single page.
• Book Copy: Allows you to copy an entire book.
• Booklet: Creates booklets from a sequential set of either 1-sided or 2-sided originals.
• Covers: Automatically adds covers to your copied set using stock taken from a different tray.
• Transparencies: Adds a blank or printed divider between transparencies within a set.
• WaterMark: Prints an image with the added watermark.
• Overlay: Prints an image with the image previously stored in your machine.
• Auto Crop: Prints only the image of an original after cropping the blank parts like the margin.
• Multi-Bin: Allows you to select the output mode.
Image Tab
• Erase Edge: Allows you to erase punch holes, staple marks, and fold creases along any of the four
documents edges.
• Erase Background: Prints an image with no background.
• Margin Shift: Creates a binding edge for the document.
• Scan Enhance: Use this feature for the better quality of copyoutput.
• Adjust Backside Image: Allows you to copy and image and remove the back-side image shown through.
2-60
Product Overview
2.3.5.3 Understanding the FAX screen
When you press Fax on the Main screen, the Fax screen appears which has several tabs and lost of fax
options. All the options are grouped by features so that you can configure your selections easily.If the screen
displays an other menu, press Home button to go to the Main screen. If you want to know more information
for Fax screen, please consult the user manual.
Basic Tab
• Fax number input area : Shows the recipient’s fax number using the number keypad on the control panel. If
you configured the phone book, press Individual or Group.
• Add No : Lets you add more destinations.
• ← : Deletes the last digit entered.
• C : Removes all digits of the selected entry.
• Remove : Removes the selected fax number entry.
• Remove All : Removes all the fax numbers in the input area.
• Address : Picks up the frequently used fax numbers directly from your machine or from SyncThru Web
Service.
• Duplex : Selects whether the machine send faxes one side of the original, both sides of the original.
• Resolution : Adjusts the resolution options.
Advanced Tab
• Original Size: Selects the size of the original document. Press OK to update current setting.
• Delay Send: Sets the machine to send a fax at a later time without your intervention.
• Priority Send: Sends an urgent fax before reserved operations.
• Polling: Used when the receiver requests the document to be faxed remotely at sender’s absence or vice
versa. In order to use the polling function, the originals must be previously stored in the machine.
• Mailbox: Used to store a received fax or originals in the machine memory which are ready to be polled. You
can use a mailbox on the same machine you are using, or the one on a remote machine. Each mailbox has
a corresponding mailbox number, name and password.
• Back: Returns to the Basic tab.
Image Tab
• Original Type: Enhances the fax quality based on the type of the original document being scanned.
• Darkness: Adjusts the level of lightness or darkness of the fax.
• Erase Background: Reduces dark backgrounds or paper patterns as in newspaper originals.
• Color Mode: Selects whether the user sends the fax in mono or color.
• Back: Returns to the Basic tab.
2-61
Product Overview
2.3.5.4 Understanding the SCAN screen
To use the scanning feature, press Scan to Email, Scan to Server , Scan to PC on the Main screen. If the
screen displays an other menu, press home button to go to the Main screen.
If the message asking Auth. ID and Password, it means the network administrator has set the authentication
in SyncThru Web Service.
• Scan to Email: Scans and sends the scanned output to the destination by email.
• Scan to Server: Scans and sends the scanned output to the destination with SMB and FTP.
• Scan to PC: Scans and sends the scanned output to the destination with the Samsung Network Scan
Manager program.
2-62
Product Overview
Scan to Email
• From: Sender’s email address.

• To/Cc/Bcc: Recipients’ addresses. Cc is for copies to an additional recipient and Bcc is same as Cc but
without their name being displayed in the email.
- Address Book: Inputs the recipient’s address just by pressing stored addresses. If you press Search, you
can search the recipient’s address. If you press Detail, you can see the detailed information of selected
recipient. If you want to edit or delete a recipient, press Edit or Delete. Select recipient’s address and
click Apply. Press to return to the previous screen. You can store frequently used email addresses from
your computer using the SyncThru Web Service.
• Subject/Message: Subject and message of the email.
• Options:
- Original Size: Sets the originals to a specific fixed size.
- Original Type: Selects whether the original is text or photo.
- Color Mode: Adjusts the color options of the scan output. If the original is color and you want to scan in
color, press Color Mode.
- Darkness: Adjusts the degree of darkness of the scan output. Use left/right arrow to adjust the values.
- Erase Background:Erases backgrounds like paper patterns.
- Scan to Edge: Scans originals from edge-to-edge.
- Quality: Adjusts the display quality of the scan output.
- File Format: Selects the file format of the scan output.
- Scan Preset: Automatically changes some scan options such as file format, resolution, and more. You
can adjust options to fit each specific purpose.
- Duplex: Selects whether the machine scans on one side of the paper (1 Sided), both sides of the paper (2
Sided), or both sides of paper but back is rotated 180 degrees (2 Sided, Rotate Side 2).
- Resolution: Selects the scanning resolution value.
• Default: Puts the default message in the input field.
• Start: Sends email. This button will be enabled if you have filled from address and one of To/Cc/Bcc
addresses.
• Next: Moves to the next screen.
• Previous: Returns to the previous screen. If the network authentication is enabled, the log off confirmation
message popes up and closes Scan to Email.
2-63
Product Overview
Scan to Server
- Basic tab
• SMB: Sends the scanned file to SMB. Press SMB for that option.
• FTP: Sends the scanned file to FTP. Press FTP for that option.
• No.: Index number which you entered in SyncThru Web Service.
• Server: Alias name which you entered in SyncThru Web Service.
• Duplex: Selects whether the machine scans on one side of the paper (1 Sided), both sides of the paper (2
Sided), or both sides of paper but back is rotated 180 degrees (2 Sided, Rotate Side 2).
• Resolution: Selects the scanning resolution value.
• Back: Returns to the previous screen.
- Advanced tab
• Original Size: Sets the originals to a specific fixed size.

2-64
Product Overview
- Image tab
• Original Type: Selects whether the original is text or photo.

• Color Mode: Adjusts the color options of the scan output. If the original is color and you want to scan in
color, press Color Mode.
• Darkness: Adjusts the degree of darkness of the scan output. Use left/right arrow to adjust the values.
• Erase Background: Erases backgrounds like paper patterns.
• Scan to Edge: Scans originals from edge-to-edge.
- Output tab
• Quality: Adjusts the display quality of the scan output.

• Scan Preset: Automatically changes some scan options such as file format, resolution, and more. You can
adjust options to fit each specific purpose.
• File Format: Selects the file format of the scan output.
2-65
Product Overview
Scan to PC
- Basic tab
If the authentication for network appears, you have to enter user name and password to enter the Scan to
PC screen. Then select an application and press Select to enter the Basic tab.
• Duplex: Selects whether the machine scans on one side of the paper (1 Sided), both sides of the paper
(2 Sided), or both sides of paper but back is rotated 180 degrees (2 Sided, Rotate Side 2).
• Resolution: Selects the scanning resolution value.
- Image tab
• Color Mode : Selects the color mode.
2-66
Product Overview
2.3.5.5 Understanding the Document Box screen
The machine shows the document box list of the print or fax job.
Press Document Box on the Main screen. If the screen displays an other menu, press to go to the Main
screen.
• User Box tab: Create the box where you can save the document such as the file you have printed, sent by
email or scanned. When you create a box, you can set the password to secure your box.
The box with a password is called Secured Box, and without it, it is called public box.
• System Box tab: The machine provided default boxes, which you cannot modify them.
• Type: Shows the box is secured or not.
• Box Name: Shows the box name.
• Owner: Shows the user name of a box.
• Date: Shows the date of a box created.
• File: Shows the number of total files in the box.
• Add: Lets you add more boxes.
• Delete: Deletes the selected box.
• Edit: Lets you to modify a box name and an owner name.
• Detail: Shows box information.
2-67
Product Overview
2.3.5.6 Understanding the USB screen
When USB memory is inserted into the USB memory port on your machine, USB icon shows on the display
• USB Format: You can delete image files stored on an USB memory device one by one or all at once by
reformatting the device.
• USB Print: You can directly print files stored on an USB memory device. You can print TIFF, BMP, JPEG,
PDF, and PRN files.
• Scan to USB: You can specify image size, file format, or color mode for each scanning to USB job.
2-68
Maintenance and Disassembly
3. Maintenance and Disassembly
Introduction
To avoid print quality and paper feed problems resulting from worn parts and to maintain your
machine in top working condition the following items will need to be replaced after the specified
number of pages or when the life span of each item has expired.
3.1 Maintenance
3.1.1 Precautions on Maintenance
■ Replacing
! The fuser is very hot. So turn the printer off and wait until the printer to cool before replacing it.
! To avoid the print quality problems, do not touch the surface of rollers.
(transfer roller, pick up roller, feed roller, Cartridge transfer Unit, Imaging Unit)
■ Cleaning
- Make sure the power cord is unplugged before the cleaning.

- Do not use flammable liquid cleaner or spray products for cleaning.
- Avoid making scratches while cleaning the parts.
- Avoid direct contact by hand on the Transfer Roller.
! Avoid exposing inner parts for a long duration of time.
! The surface of OPC drum in Imaging Unit can be affected by direct light if exposed for a long time.
(1~2 minutes is enough time for cleaning)
! The OPC surface of Imaging Unit and belt surface of Cartridge transfer unit must not be scratched.
3-1
3.1.2 Check the consumables life
3.1.2.1 Printing Machine report
You can see the consumables life by printing a machine report.
1. Press the Machine setup button on the control panel.

2. Press Machine Status>the Machine Info tab>Print/Report
3. Select the report type, then the right side of the screen shows the list to print.
4. Select the list to print.
3.1.2.2 Monitoring the supplies life
If you want to view the consumables life, follow the next step.
1. Press the Machine Setup button on control panel.

2. Press the Machine Status
3. Scroll down to browse the entire supplies with list view the percentage remaining.
3-2
3.1.3 Consumables (CRU : Customer Replacement Unit)
Model Name Description Life Image
CLX-C8540A Toner Cartridge (Cyan) 15K Pages
CLX-M8540A Toner Cartridge (Magenta) 15K Pages
CLX-Y8540A Toner Cartridge (Yellow) 15K Pages
CLX-K8540A Toner Cartridge (Black) 20K Pages
CLX-R8540C Imaging Unit (Cyan) 30K Pages
CLX-R8540M Imaging Unit (Magenta) 30K Pages
CLX-R8540Y Imaging Unit (Yellow) 30K Pages
CLX-R8540K Imaging Unit (Black) 30K Pages
CLX-W8380A Waste toner bottle 48K Images
Note
• Declared yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798.

For ISO/IEC 19798 standard pages, refer to section 3 of chapter 6.
• Image counts are based on one color on each page. If you print documents in full color (Yellow, Magenta,
Cyan, Black), the image count will be added by 4 images.
3-3
3.1.4 Replacing the Consumables
3.1.4.1 Replacing the toner cartridge
1. Turn the machine off, then wait a few minutes for 4. Pull the corresponding toner cartridge out from
the machine to cool. the machine.
2. Open the side cover.
5. Remove the new toner cartridge from its bag.
6. Thoroughly roll the new cartridge five or six times

3. Open the front cover. to distribute the toner evenly inside the cartridge.
7. Hold the new toner cartridge by the handle and

slide the new toner cartridge in until it locks in
place.
3-4
8. Close the front cover, then the side cover.
9. Make sure that the cover is securely latched and

then turn the machine on.
3.1.4.2 Replacing the imaging unit
1. Turn the machine off, then wait a few minutes for 4. Pull the waste toner container out of the machine
the machine to cool. using its handle.
5. Turn the imaging unit locking levers outwards to

release and open the inner cover.
3. Open the front cover.
3-5
6. Pull the used imaging unit out of the machine 11. Labels inside the machine identify each imaging
using the handle on its bottom. unit’s position.
Holding the handles on the new imaging unit,
push the imaging unit until it locks in place.
7. Remove the new imaging unit from its bag.
8. Remove the paper protecting the surface of the

imaging unit. 12. Turn the imaging unit locking levers inwards
until it locks in place and close the inner cover.in
9. Remove the cap, and carefully pull the seal
tapes out of the imaging unit.
13. Insert the waste toner container into position

and then push it to make sure that it is firmly
seated in place.
10. Thoroughly shake the new imaging unit side to 14. Close the front cover, then the side cover.
side five or six times.
15. Make sure that the cover is securely latched
and then turn the machine on.
3-6
3.1.4.3 Replacing the waste toner container
1. Turn the machine off, then wait a few minutes for 5. Remove the container’s cap from the container
the machine to cool. as shown below, and use it to close the waste
toner container openings.
6. Take a new waste toner container out of its

package.
7. Insert the new container into position and then

push it to make sure that it is firmly seated in
place.
3. Open the front cover. 8. Close the front cover firmly.
9. Turn the machine on.
4. Pull the waste toner container out of the machine

using its handle.
3-7
3.1.5 Maintenance Parts (FRU : Field Replacement Unit)
Sec_Code Description Life Image
CARTRIDGE-TRANSFER
JC96-04601A 100K
(ITB)
MEA UNIT-TR
JC97-02934A 100K
(Transfer roller Assy)
JC96-04867A (110V) ELA UNIT-FUSER LV

100K
JC96-04868A (220V) ELA UNIT-FUSER HV
MEA-HOLDER ADF
JC97-03097A 50K
RUBBER
MEA-PICK UP
JC97-03099A 200K
(DADF pick up Assy)
MEA UNIT-HOLDER PAD

JC97-02260A 50K
(MP tray pad Assy)
JC96-03533A ELA HOU-MP PICK UP 200K
JC97-03269A MEA UNIT-Exit Duplex 100K
MEA UNIT-ROLLER PU
(Pick up roller
JC97-02259A 100K
Forward roller
Retard roller)
JC90-00956A DUPLEX-COVER FILTER 100K
3-8
■ Maintenance KIT List
Model code KIT component Part Code Qty Life time Remark
CARTRIDGE-TRANSFER (ITB) JC96-04601A 1
MEA UNIT-TR (Transfer roller) JC97-02934A 1
ELA UNIT-FUSER HV (Fuser) JC96-04868A 1 100K
CLX-V8385A MEA UNIT-EXIT DUPLEX JC97-03269A 1 100K Korea
MEA UNIT-ROLLER PU (Pick up/ JC97-02259A 3 220V
Forward/ Retard roller)
DUPLEX-COVER FILTER JC90-00956A 1
ELA UNIT-FUSER HV (Fuser) JC96-04868A 1
Export
CLX-V8385A/SEE MEA UNIT-EXIT DUPLEX JC97-03269A 1 100K
220V
MEA UNIT-ROLLER PU (Pick up/ JC97-02259A 3
ELA UNIT-FUSER LV (Fuser) JC96-04867A 1
Export
CLX-V8385A/XAA MEA UNIT-EXIT DUPLEX JC97-03269A 1 100K
110V
MEA UNIT-ROLLER PU (Pick up/ JC97-02259A 3
3-9
3.1.6 Location of Maintenance parts
DADF Pick up roller DADF rubber Pad
Duplex Cover Filter

Mea Unit Exit Duplex
Fuser unit
Transfer Roller
MP tray feed roller
MP tray rubber pad
Cartridge transfer Pick up roller
3-10
3.1.7 Replacing the Maintenance parts
3.1.7.1 How to replace the cartridge transfer unit
5. Turn the imaging unit locking levers inwards to

3-11
6. Take out the Cartridge transfer unit and replace 7. Close the inner cover.
the new one.
8. Insert the waste toner container.
9. Close the front cover, then the side cover.
3.1.7.2 How to replace the transfer roller
1. Open the side cover and then pull the guide- 2. Push the latch in the two directions and pull the
paper up in the direction of arrow. Transfer roller. And replace the new one.
3-12
3.1.7.3 How to replace the Fuser unit
1. Open the side cover. 2. Pull the Fuser unit by holding the green lever.
And replace the new one
3-13
3.1.7.4 How to replace the DADF pick up roller and rubber pad.
1. Open the DADF Cover. 3. Remove the rubber pad unit.
2. Pull the bush in the direction of arrow. Then lift

the DADF pick up roller out.
3-14
3.1.7.5 How to replace the Pick-up Roller
1. To remove the pick up roller, first take out the cassette. After remove the cassette, you can see 3 rollers
(Pick up/ Forward/ Retard) in the inner.
Forward Roller
Forward Roller
Pick Up Roller
Pick Up Roller
Retard Roller
Retard Roller
2. Take out the roller after pulling the hinge of pick up roller in the direction of arrow.
2 2
1 1
3-15
3.1.7.6 How to replace the MP pad Unit and MP feed roller
1. To remove the MP unit, first remove the side duplex. (Refer to 3.2.2.13 Side duplex)
2. Remove the MP pad unit after remove the 1 screw.
Gear
Bracket
3. Remove the 4 screws and 2 hooks and take out the MP Assy.
Right
Hook
Right
Hook
Left
Left
3-16
ELA HOU-MP
ELA HOU-MP
ELA
ELA HOU-MP
4. Done. HOU-MP
ELA HOU-MP
MEA UNIT-HOLDER PAD
MEA UNIT-HOLDER PAD

MEA
MEA UNIT-HOLDER
UNIT-HOLDER PAD
PAD
MEA UNIT-HOLDER PAD
<How to replace the MP feed roller>
5. Release the harness from the holder. 7. Remove the 4 screws from both side of MP unit.
6. Remove the spring from hook with some tools.
8. Lift up the FRAME-MP TOP.
3-17
ELA-
Maintenance and Disassembly HOU MP PICK- UP
9. Done. <How to reassemble MP feed roller>
12. Assemble the spring to ELA HOU-MP Pick up.
ELA-
ELA-HOU
HOUMP
MPPICK-
PICK-UP
UP
10. Remove the RING-E(2 EA) from both side of

FRAME-MP LOWER.
13. Fix the LATCH ARM F,R.
11. Replace the ELA-HOU MP PICK-UP with new

one.
ELA- HOU MP PICK- UP
3-18
14. When reassembling the FRAME-MP TOP, 16. Assemble the SPRING as shown below.
assemble the STOPPER PAPER F,R to be in
the hole.
17. Assemble in reverse order after this step.
15. Check that LATCH ARM F,R assemble properly.
3-19
3.1.7.7 How to replace the MEA UNIT-Exit Duplex
1. Open the side duplex cover.

Release the Exit Duplex Unit by removing the 4 hooks after remove 1 screw.
MEA UNIT-EXIT DUPLEX
3-20
3.1.7.8 How to replace the DUPLEX-COVER FILTER
1. Open the side duplex cover. And press the hook as shown below.
2. Release the duplex-cover filter.
3-21
3.1.8 Cleaning the machine

To maintain print and scan quality, follow the cleaning procedures below
each time the toner cartridge is replaced or if print and scan quality problems occur.
Caution
• Cleaning the machine cabinet with cleaning materials that contain large amounts of alcohol, solvent, or
other strong substances can discolor or damage the cabinet.
• If your machine or its surrounding is contaminated with toner, we recommend you to use cloth or tissue
dampened with water to clean it. If you use a vacuum cleaner, toner blows in the air and might be harmful
to you.
3.1.8.1 Cleaning Items and Interval
Item Interval or When

Replacement consumable When displayed “Toner Empty” or “Replace Drum” or
(Toner Cartridges, Imaging Units, WTB ) “Waste Toner Full” .
Cleaning of Feed frame and Feed Rollers on
Misfeeds or Jams occur frequently
the paper-path
Cleaning of Document (Platen) glass The same copy area is dirty whenever making copies.
Cleaning of Platen Cover (sheet-sponge) Original cannot be cleanly scanned.
Originals have black streaks or appear dirty after feeding
Cleaning Feeder and PAD in the DADF
them in the DADF.
Cleaning of LSU glass
Streaks appear on copy sheet
Cleaning of Document glass for DADF
Cleaning of original guide plate in rear side of
DADF and DADF roller
Fasten the rest of the guide in the paper tray
(Width Guide and Length Guide)
Pick up a stack/tray of paper and fan it to
Multi-feeds occur frequently
remove static cling
Image ghost, Light image, paper’s rear side contamination
Replace the Transfer roller
occur.
3-22
3.1.8.2 Cleaning the machine outside
Clean the machine cabinet with a soft lint-free cloth. You can dampen the cloth slightly with water, but be
careful not to let any water drip onto or into the machine.
3.1.8.3 Cleaning the machine inside
Clean every 100,000 sheets or every 6 months to maintain in good condition.

(When the life of Transfer Roller expires due to long usage.)
Clean in following order; Paper Path Parts, Transfer Roller area, Toner Cartridge and Imaging unit area in the
Inner Frame.
Clean with Vacuum Cleaner and Dry rag or Soft cloth.
5. Turn the imaging unit locking levers outwards to

3-23
6. Take out the toner cartridge. 9. Take out the cartridge transfer unit.
7. Take out the Imaging unit. 10. Clean the paper path parts.
8. Lay the black paper on imaging unit to protect 11. Clean the paper path parts.
the OPC surface.
3-24
12. Clean the paper path parts. 15. Clean the transfer roller area.
13. Release the transfer roller. 16. Clean the transfer roller area.
14. Clean the transfer roller area. 17. Clean the transfer roller area.
3-25
18. Reassemble the transfer roller. 21. Reassemble the imaging unit.
19. Clean the Frame inside. 22. Reassemble the toner cartridge.
23. Close the inner cover.

20. Reassemble the Cartridge Transfer.
24. Insert the waste toner container.
25. Close the front cover.
26. Close the side cover.
3-26
3.1.8.4 Cleaning the scan outside glass
Keeping the scan unit clean helps ensure the best possible copies. We suggest that you clean the scan unit
at the start of each day and during the day, as needed.
1 Slightly dampen a soft lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.
2 Open the scanner lid.
3 Wipe the surface of the scanner glass and DADF glass until it is clean and dry.
4. Wipe the underside of the scanner lid until it is clean and dry.
5. Close the scanner lid.
3.1.8.5 Cleaning the scan inside glass
1. Perform the procedure 1~6 of 3.2.2.4 Scan Assy.

2. Wipe the surface of the scan inside glass.
3. Reassemble the Scan Assy.
3-27
3.2 Disassembly and Reassembly
3.2.1 General Precautions on Disassembly
When you disassemble and reassemble Releasing Plastic Latches

components, you must use extreme caution. The
close proximity of cables to moving parts makes Many of the parts are held in place with plastic
proper routing a must. latches. The latches break easily; release them
If components are removed, any cables disturbed carefully.
by the procedure must be restored as close as To remove such parts, press the hook end of the
possible to their original positions. Before removing latch away from the part to which it is latched.
any component from the machine, note the cable
routing that will be affected.
Whenever servicing the machine, you

must perform as follows:
1. Check to verify that documents are not stored in

memory.
2. Be sure to remove the toner cartridge before you

disassemble parts.
3. Unplug the power cord.
4. Use a flat and clean surface.
5. Replace only with authorized components.
6. Do not force plastic-material components.
7. Make sure all components are in their proper

position.
3-28
3.2.1.1 Screws used in the printer
Part_Code Location Description Qty

6003-000282 ELA UNIT-LSU SCREW-TAPTITE;BH,+,-,B,M3,L8,ZPC(BLK),SWRCH18A,- 20
6003-000282 ELA UNIT-LD_Y SCREW-TAPTITE;BH,+,-,B,M3,L8,ZPC(BLK),SWRCH18A,- 2
6001-000130 SCREW-MACHINE;BH,+,M3,L6,ZPC(WHT),SWRCH18A,-,- 2
6003-000196 DUPLEX SCREW-TAPTITE;PWH,+,B,M3,L10,NI PLT,SWRCH18A 23
6003-000269 SCREW-TAPTITE;BH,+,-,S,M3,L6,ZPC(WHT),SWRCH18A,- 2
6002-000440 SCREW-TAPPING;PWH,+,-,2,M3,L8,ZPC(BLK),SWRCH18A,- 4
ELA HOU-DUPLEX
6003-000196 SCREW-TAPTITE;PWH,+,B,M3,L10,NI PLT,SWRCH18A 5
6003-000264 MEA UNIT-TRAY SCREW-TAPTITE;PWH,+,-,B,M3,L6,ZPC(WHT),SWRCH18A,- 1
6003-000196 MEA UNIT-EXIT DUPLEX SCREW-TAPTITE;PWH,+,B,M3,L10,NI PLT,SWRCH18A 1
FRAME
6003-001256 SCREW-TAPTITE;BH,+,B,M4,L10,NI PLT,SWRCH18A 5
6009-001492 SCREW-HEX;HWH,+,M3,L8,NI PLT,SWRCH18A,S,RF 9
ELA UNIT-BASE FRAME
SCREW-SPECIAL;PH,+,-,M3,L10.3,ZPC(BLK),SWRCH18A,B
6009-001396 2
TITE,-
6003-000282 ELA UNIT-SIZE SENSOR SCREW-TAPTITE;BH,+,-,B,M3,L8,ZPC(BLK),SWRCH18A,- 2
6003-000266 ELA UNIT-CST SENSOR SCREW-TAPTITE;PWH,+,-,S,M3,L6,ZPC(WHT),SWRCH18A,- 2
ELA UNIT-BASE PLATE R
6003-001474 SCREW-TAPTITE;BH,+,-,B,M3,L30,ZPC(WHT),SWRCH18A,- 3
ELA UNIT-PLATE UPPER
6003-000196 ELA HOU-MP SCREW-TAPTITE;PWH,+,B,M3,L10,NI PLT,SWRCH18A 4
6003-000196 ELA UNIT-BASE RIGHT SCREW-TAPTITE;PWH,+,B,M3,L10,NI PLT,SWRCH18A 6
6003-000269 MEA UNIT-RETARD SCREW-TAPTITE;BH,+,-,S,M3,L6,ZPC(WHT),SWRCH18A,- 2
FRMAE-LOWER
6003-000196 ELA UNIT-HV ITB SCREW-TAPTITE;PWH,+,B,M3,L10,NI PLT,SWRCH18A 4
6003-000269 ELA UNIT-WTB MOTOR SCREW-TAPTITE;BH,+,-,S,M3,L6,ZPC(WHT),SWRCH18A,- 2
6003-000269 ELA UNIT-HOLDER OPC SCREW-TAPTITE;BH,+,-,S,M3,L6,ZPC(WHT),SWRCH18A,- 11
6003-000196 ELA UNIT-HV TR SCREW-TAPTITE;PWH,+,B,M3,L10,NI PLT,SWRCH18A 2
6003-000196 ELA HOU-BOTTLE BASE SCREW-TAPTITE;PWH,+,B,M3,L10,NI PLT,SWRCH18A 13
6003-000196 ELA UNIT-HV DEVE SCREW-TAPTITE;PWH,+,B,M3,L10,NI PLT,SWRCH18A 8
3-29

6003-000196 FRAME REGI SCREW-TAPTITE;PWH,+,B,M3,L10,NI PLT,SWRCH18A 5
6003-000196 ELA HOU-GUIDE REGI SCREW-TAPTITE;PWH,+,B,M3,L10,NI PLT,SWRCH18A 6
6003-000196 MEA UNIT-F DR SCREW-TAPTITE;PWH,+,B,M3,L10,NI PLT,SWRCH18A 1
6003-000196 ELA UNIT-FRAME UPPER SCREW-TAPTITE;PWH,+,B,M3,L10,NI PLT,SWRCH18A 12
6003-000196 ELA HOU-GUIDE EXIT SCREW-TAPTITE;PWH,+,B,M3,L10,NI PLT,SWRCH18A 2
6003-000269 ELA UNIT-SUPPORT SCAN SCREW-TAPTITE;BH,+,-,S,M3,L6,ZPC(WHT),SWRCH18A,- 3
SCREW-SPECIAL;SPECIAL,±,-,M3,L10,NI
6009-001390 ELA UNIT-SCANNER 1
PLT,SWRCH18A,B-TITE,D9, L13.5, DIME
6003-000196 ELA UNIT-PLATEN SCREW-TAPTITE;PWH,+,B,M3,L10,NI PLT,SWRCH18A 6
6003-000269 ELA UNIT-SCAN LOWER SCREW-TAPTITE;BH,+,-,S,M3,L6,ZPC(WHT),SWRCH18A,- 4
6003-000282 ELA UNIT-CCDM HIGH SCREW-TAPTITE;BH,+,-,B,M3,L8,ZPC(BLK),SWRCH18A,- 10
6003-000282 MEA UNIT-COVER KHX SCREW-TAPTITE;BH,+,-,B,M3,L8,ZPC(BLK),SWRCH18A,- 3
6003-000269 ELA UNIT-SCAN MOTOR SCREW-TAPTITE;BH,+,-,S,M3,L6,ZPC(WHT),SWRCH18A,- 2
ELA UNIT-SCAN UPPER
6003-000196 MEA UNIT-DUMMY UPPER SCREW-TAPTITE;PWH,+,B,M3,L10,NI PLT,SWRCH18A 1
6003-000269 ELA HOU-DADF SCREW-TAPTITE;BH,+,-,S,M3,L6,ZPC(WHT),SWRCH18A,- 8
ELA HOU-COVER PLATEN
6003-001324 SCREW-TAPTITE;BH,+,B,M4,L16,NI PLT,SWRCH18A,- 8
6003-000196 ELA HOU-COVER JAM SCREW-TAPTITE;PWH,+,B,M3,L10,NI PLT,SWRCH18A 1
ELA HOU-DADF SUB
6003-000269 ELA HOU-DADF MOTOR SCREW-TAPTITE;BH,+,-,S,M3,L6,ZPC(WHT),SWRCH18A,- 4
6003-000269 ELA HOU-DUPLEX MOTOR SCREW-TAPTITE;BH,+,-,S,M3,L6,ZPC(WHT),SWRCH18A,- 2
6003-000196 ELA HOU-GUIDE SCAN SCREW-TAPTITE;PWH,+,B,M3,L10,NI PLT,SWRCH18A 7
6003-000196 ELA HOU-COVER OPEN SCREW-TAPTITE;PWH,+,B,M3,L10,NI PLT,SWRCH18A 5
6003-000196 MEA-EXIT SCREW-TAPTITE;PWH,+,B,M3,L10,NI PLT,SWRCH18A 2
6003-000196 MEA-GUIDE PICKUP SCREW-TAPTITE;PWH,+,B,M3,L10,NI PLT,SWRCH18A 4
MEA-TX STACKER
DRIVE MAIN
3-30

DRIVE-DEVE
ELA UNIT-DRIVE FUSER
6003-000282 CARTRIDGE-TRANSFER SCREW-TAPTITE;BH,+,-,B,M3,L8,ZPC(BLK),SWRCH18A,- 20
MAINLINE SCREW-SPECIAL;SPECIAL,±,-,M3,L10,NI
6009-001390 4
PLT,SWRCH18A,B-TITE,D9, L13.5, DIME
SCREW-SPECIAL;PH,+,-,M3,L10.3,ZPC(BLK),SWRCH18A,B
6009-001396 4
TITE,-
ELA HOU-EXIT
ELA UNIT-SMPS UPPER
6003-000196 ELA UNIT-HOLDER_HVPS SCREW-TAPTITE;PWH,+,B,M3,L10,NI PLT,SWRCH18A 2
6003-000269 ELA UNIT-SUPPORT REAR SCREW-TAPTITE;BH,+,-,S,M3,L6,ZPC(WHT),SWRCH18A,- 2
6003-000282 CARTRIDGE-DRUM Y KIT SCREW-TAPTITE;BH,+,-,B,M3,L8,ZPC(BLK),SWRCH18A,- 7
6003-000282 SCREW-TAPTITE;BH,+,-,B,M3,L8,ZPC(BLK),SWRCH18A,- 5
ELA HOU-DEVE UNIT
SCREW-MACHINE;PH,+,WSP,M3,10,ZPC(WHT),SWRCH18
6006-001193 2
A,-,WD8,TEMPERED
CARTRIDGE-SUB OPC
CART
6003-000282 CARTRIDGE-DRUM M KIT SCREW-TAPTITE;BH,+,-,B,M3,L8,ZPC(BLK),SWRCH18A,- 7
ELA HOU-DEVE UNIT
6006-001193 2
A,-,WD8,TEMPERED
CARTRIDGE-SUB OPC
CART
6003-000282 CARTRIDGE-DRUM C KIT SCREW-TAPTITE;BH,+,-,B,M3,L8,ZPC(BLK),SWRCH18A,- 7
ELA HOU-DEVE UNIT
6006-001193 2
A,-,WD8,TEMPERED
CARTRIDGE-SUB OPC
CART
3-31

6003-000282 CARTRIDGE-DRUM K KIT SCREW-TAPTITE;BH,+,-,B,M3,L8,ZPC(BLK),SWRCH18A,- 7
ELA HOU-DEVE UNIT
6006-001193 2
A,-,WD8,TEMPERED
6003-000282 MEA UNIT-OPC CART SCREW-TAPTITE;BH,+,-,B,M3,L8,ZPC(BLK),SWRCH18A,- 2
CARTRIDGE-TONER K KIT
ELA UNIT-TONER Y
CARTRIDGE-TONER M KIT
ELA UNIT-TONER C
ELA HOU-OPE
6003-000196 ELA HOU-OPE COVER SCREW-TAPTITE;PWH,+,B,M3,L10,NI PLT,SWRCH18A 7
ELA UNIT-FUSER LV
MEA UNIT-CASSETTE
6006-001193 1
A,-,WD8,TEMPERED
6002-000440 MEA UNIT-LIFTING GEAR SCREW-TAPPING;PWH,+,-,2,M3,L8,ZPC(BLK),SWRCH18A,- 2
6003-001001 MEA UNIT-COVER FRONT SCREW-TAPTITE;FH,+,B,M3,L8,ZPC(BLK),SWRCH18A 2
MEA UNIT-COVER INNER
MEA UNIT-FRONT OPC SCREW-TAPTITE;PH,+,WSP,B,M3,L10,ZPC(WHT),SWRCH1
6006-001078 12
8A,-
3-32
3.2.2 General Disassembly
3.2.2.1 Cover
1. Remove the 12 screws from the rear of SET. 4. Remove the Cover rear and the Cover rear
lower.
2. Remove the 4 screws from the left side of SET.

And remove the Cover Panel MFP. 5. Remove the 2 screws and then remove the Unit
Cover Top.
M3X10
M3X10
M3X10
M3X10
M4X10
M4X10
M4X10
M4X10 M3X10
M3X10
M3X10
M3X10
M4X10
M4X10
M4X10
M4X10
3. Remove the COVER-PANEL MFP.

Note : In case of being installed the fax kit, remove the fax kit after
remove the 2 screws.
3-33
6. Open the Side Duplex Cover and the Front cover. And then remove the left side cover.
SIDE-DUPLEX COVER
COVER- COVER-FRONT
SIDE LEFT
3-34
3.2.2.2 DADF Unit
1. Remove 3 screws, and disassemble the DADF 3. Make the DADF unit stand at an angle of 45
harness cover. degrees and lift up and separate it.
4. Open the DADF cover, and remove the one

screw.
2. Remove the bracket by using a tool such as

tweezers.
Unplug the harness.
5. Lift up the stacker, and remove the two screws.
3-35
5. Remove the front/rear cover of the DADF. 8. Remove the 3 screws, and then remove the
DADF board.
6. Unplug the all harness from the DADF board.
9. Pull the bush in the direction of arrow. Then lift

the DADF pick up roller out.
7. Remove the 2 screws, and then remove the

harness holder.
10. Remove the DADF pad unit.
3-36
3.2.2.3 OPE
1. Pull up the OPE cover. 4. Unplug 2 connectors on the OPE PBA. And
release the OPE unit from set.
5. Lift up the OPE assy as shown below, and

Unplug the connector. And release the OPE
assy from set.
2. Remove 3 screws.
6. Disconnect the 2 harness, 3 flexible pcb, and

remove the 4 screws. And then remove the OPE
PBA.
3. Lift up the OPE unit as shown below.
3-37
7. To remove the LCD panel, remove the 10 screws. Take out the LCD panel after remove the LCD panel
shield.
3.2.2.4 Scan Ass’y
3.2.2.4.1 Platen Ass’y
Note – Before disassembling the platen unit, remove the DADF unit (3.2.2.2) and OPE unit(3.2.2.3)
But, when replacing the DADF, Scanner, OPE unit on the whole, it is not necessary.
1. Open the side door. Remove 2 screws. And 2. Remove the 4 screws from front-down side of
remove the Front dummy cover. scan assy.
3-38
3. Remove the 3 screws and all harness connected 4. Lift up and release the Platen Assy.
to scan assy.
2
3 1
3.2.2.4.2 Scan upper (Scan glass)
Note – Before disassembling the platen unit, remove the DADF unit (3.2.2.2) and OPE unit(3.2.2.3)
But, when replacing the DADF, Scanner, OPE unit on the whole, it is not necessary.
1. Remove the 6 screws (cap hole screw 3 EA) 2. Open the side cover. Pull both bottom sides of
the scan upper , lift up and release it.
3-39
3. Release the Lever-locker from the scan upper

after remove the 2 screws.
3.2.2.4.3 CCD Unit and FFC cable
Note – Before disassembling the CCD unit, remove the scan upper (3.2.2.4.2)
1. Lift the CCD unit up and remove the FFC cable. 2. Remove the CCD cable cover.
And remove the CCD unit from the set.
3-40
3. Remove the rear cover. And unplug the FFC cable on Video PBA.
3-41
3.2.2.4.4 APS sensor
Note – Before disassembling the APS sensor, remove the scan upper (3.2.2.4.2)
1. Remove the APS sensor cover by unhooking as 2. Unplug the harness and remove 2 screws
shown below. Replace APS sensors.
APSAPS
APS
Sensor
Sensor
Sensor
Hook
Hook
Hook
Note
When replacing the APS sensor,
connect the harness.
3-42
3.2.2.4.5 Scan motor and belt
Note – Before disassembling the scan motor and belt, remove the scan upper (3.2.2.4.2)
1. Remove 4 screws. Release the Scan motor. 2. Release the belt while compressing the spring.
3-43
3.2.2.5 Video board
1. Remove 8 screws. And remove the rear cover. 3. Remove 4 screws. Release the video board with
the shield from the engine board.
And release the board from the shield by
removing screws.
2, Unplug the harness on the video board.
Caution
When reassembling it, fit the shield to be latched.
Caution
When replacing the Video board, you must insert
the MSOK on new video board.
3-44
3.2.2.6 Engine Board
1. Remove 8 screws. And remove the rear cover. 3. Remove 4 screws.

Release the video board with the shield from the
engine board.
2. Unplug the harness on the video board.
4. Unplug the all harness and remove the 9 screws.

And release the engine board from the shield.
3-45
3.2.2.7 SMPS board and FDB board
1. Remove 12 screws. And remove the Cover rear 4. Unplug the all harness and remove the 4 screws.
and the Cover rear lower. And release the FDB board from the shield.
Caution
2. Remove 3 screws. Unplug the harness. When reassembling the SMPS shield cover, be
And release the SMPS shield. careful not to cut the harness.
M3X10
M4X10
M3X10
M4X10
3. Unplug the all harness and remove the 8 screws.

And release the SMPS board from the shield.
3-46
3.2.2.8 Main Drive Unit
1. Remove the 4 screws and remove the SMPS 3. Remove the Main Drive Unit after removing 6
cover. screws.
Fixer
2. Remove 3 fixers from clutches. Unplug one Note

connector and remove one screw. And remove When reassembling the main drive unit, do it after
the 3 clutches below. pressing the ACR sensor with finger.
Fixer
Note
When disassembling the main drive unit, Don’t
have to unplug the 3 below clutch harness. If you
want to replace these clutches, refer to the next
page.
3-47
< How to replace the cluch >
1. Hold the harness with the nipper. 2. Unplug the harness as shown below.
Caution
Don’t grip with force. It is easy to disconnect.
※ Precautions
1. When reassembling the 2 clutch below, check the harness color.

There is the incuse on the shield. B/B means black/black harness, G/B means gary/black harness.
G/B
B/B
3-48
3.2.2.9 Deve Drive Unit
Before removing the deve drive unit, remove the video board.
1. Release the harness holder in the direction of 2. Remove the 6 screws, and remove the Deve
arrow after remove the 2 screws. Drive unit.
3.2.2.10 Fuser Drive Unit
Before removing the fuser drive unit, remove the engine board.
1. Remove the 6 screws, and remove the Fuser

Drive unit.
3-49
3.2.2.11 LSU
1. Remove 5 screws on the COVER-SIDE LEFT.
COVER-SIDE
LEFT
2. Open the SIDE-DUPLEX COVER and the COVER FRONT. And then remove the COVER-SIDE LEFT.
SIDE-DUPLEX COVER
COVER- COVER-FRONT
SIDE LEFT
3. Remove 9 screws and remove the HVPS large PBA.
HVPS large
PBA
3-50
4. Remove the protection film. 6. Remove 1 screw. Release the spring. And take
off the pusher LSU.
Protection Film
Protection Film
Protection Film
Protection Film
Pusher LSU
Pusher LSU
Pusher LSU
Pusher LSU
5. Remove 3 screws and release the Holder HVPS.

7. Unplug the LSU Joint harness. And release the
LSU.
Holder
HVPS LSU
Holder LSU
LSU
Holder
Holder
HVPS LSU
HVPS
Holder
HVPS
HVPS
Caution
When reassembling the LSU, be careful not to cut
or oppress the LSU joint harness.
LSU Joint Harness

LSU Joint Harness
LSU Joint Harness
LSU Joint Harness
3-51
3.2.2.12 HVPS board
1. Remove 5 screws on the COVER-SIDE LEFT.
COVER-SIDE
LEFT
2. Open the SIDE-DUPLEX COVER and the COVER FRONT. And then remove the COVER-SIDE LEFT.
SIDE-DUPLEX COVER
COVER- COVER-FRONT
SIDE LEFT
3. Remove 9 screws Unplug all harness. And remove the HVPS large PBA.
HVPS large
PBA
3-52
4. Remove the protection sheet. 5. Unplug all harness and 5 screws.

And release HVPS small board.
Caution
When reassembling the HVPS board, be careful to
connect the ground harness.
3-53
3.2.2.13 Side Duplex
1. Remove the cover rear. (Refer to 3.2.2.1 Cover) 3. Cut the cable tie.
4. Remove the mold E-Ring and clutch.
2. Find the sensor harness and unplug it.
3-54
5. Remove 2 screws. 7. Open the side cover (Side duplex).
6. Unplug the connector. 8. Release the holder from both side.
3-55
Caution - Don’t open the side cover over a right angle.
9. Lift up the side duplex to remove the hook from both side. And release the side duplex.
Caution - When reassembling the side duplex, please check that both hook is put properly.
3-56
3.2.2.14 ACR/CTD Sensor
1. Open the side door. Take off the fuser unit. 2. Open the front cover. And remove the cartridge
transfer unit.
3. Rotate the gear in the main drive with fingers. and make the ACR cover CAM position(3-2) as shown
below.
3-1 3-2
3-1 3-2
3-1 3-2
3-57
4. Remove the spring from the right of the ACR 6. Replace the ACR sensor Front/Rear and CTD
sensor cover. sensor.
ACR_F
ACR_F CTD ACR_R
5. Loose the screw from the right of the ACR

sensor cover until the cover can be removed.
ACR_F
ACR_F CTD ACR_R
ACR_F
ACR_F CTD ACR_R
3-58
3.2.2.15 Duplex Sensor
1. Open the side door. Take off the fuser unit. 3. Remove 2 hooks with tweezers from both side.
Hook 1
Hook 1
Hook 1
HookHook
1 1
2. Remove 2 screws on the Regi Guide.
Hook 2
Hook 2
Hook 2
HookHook
2 2
Regi Guide
Regi Guide
Regi
Regi Guide
Guide
Regi Guide
4. Replace the duplex sensor.
3-59
Guide Exit
3.2.2.16 Exit Sensor
1. Open the side door. Take off the fuser unit. 3. Replace the Exit sensor.
Exit Sensor
2. Remove 4 screws. Remove the Guide Exit.
Guide Exit
Exit Sensor
3-60
3.2.2.17 Feed Sensor
1. Open the side door. 4. Remove 2 hooks(1,2) of the harness guide.
Hook 1,2
Hook 1,2
Hook 1,2 1,2
Hook
Feed Roller Hook
Hook
1,2 1,2
Ass’y
Feed Roller
Feed Roller
Ass’y
Feed Roller
Feed Ass’y
Ass’y Roller
Feed
Roller
Ass’y
Ass’y
2. Remove the spring to connect the feed roller 5. Remove a hook (3) of the harness guide.
Assy.
Spring
Spring Hook 3
Spring
Spring Hook 3
Spring
Spring Hook 3 3
Hook
Hook
Hook
3 3
6. Replace the Feed sensor.

3. Push the Assy to the direction or arrow.
Feed Sensor
Feed Sensor
Feed
Feed Sensor
Sensor
Feed
Feed
Sensor
Sensor
3-61
3.2.2.18 Regi Sensor
1. Release the Regi Clutch on Main Drive unit. 4. Remove 7 screws on Regi Frame.
2. Release both side door supports. 5. Put down the clutch part of the regi frame.
3. Remove 4 screws and release the Regi. guide. 6. Replace the Feed sensor.
3-62
3.2.2.19 WTB Full Sensor
1. Remove the waste toner box (WTB). Open the 3. Remove 2 screws and release the WTB full
Front OPC. sensor cover.
WTB full sensor
WTB full sensorCover
Cover
WTB full sensor
Cover
Front OPC
Front OPC
Front OPC
2. Remove the imaging unit.
3-63
4. Hold the Waste Full sensor harness (4 Pin on HVPS) and WTB Full sensor with hands. Carefully pull them
to the direction of arrow until you can see the joint connector.
Waste
WasteFull
Fullsensor
sensor
Waste Full sensor
(4pin
(4pinon
onHVPS)
HVPS) Joint
JointConnector
Connector
(4pin on HVPS) Joint Connector
WTBFull
WTB Fullsensor
sensor
WTB Full sensor
5. Replace the WTB full sensor.
3-64
3.2.2.20 1-bin Finisher
1. Unplug the connector from the SET. 4. Release the cover scan dummy [A] after
removing 1 screw.
[A]
[A]
[A]
[A]
[A]
[A]
5. Take out the staple cartridge [B].

2. Pull the Finisher carefully from the SET with And remove 3 screws.
pushing the latch.
[B]
[B]
[B]
[B]
[B]
[B]
6. Remove 1 screw.
3. Push the hook and release the tray stacker.
3-65
7. Release the front cover [C]. 10. Release the rear cover.
[C]
[C]
[C]
[C]
[C] [D]
[D]
[C] [D]
[D]
[D]
[D]
8. To remove the rear cover, remove 1 screw. 11. To remove the top cover, remove 2 screws.
9. Remove 1 screw. 12. Release the top cover [E] after removing
2 screws.
[E]
[E]
[E]
[E]
[E]
[E]
3-66
13. Release the paddle [F]. 16. To remove the finisher main PBA, remove 2
screws.
[F]
[F]
[F]
[F]
[F]
[F]
14. To remove the stay stacker, remove 2 screws.

17. Remove 2 screws.
15. Release the stay stacker after removing 2

screws. 18. Lift the shield stacker up and unplug the
connector.
3-67
19. Unplug all connector on board. Remove 3 22. Unplug 2 connectors. Remove 3 screws.
screws and 3 fixer. And release the PBA. And release the stapler unit.
20. To remove the Finisher connector, remove 2 23. Remove 2 screw. Unplug the connector.
screws. And remove the motor unit.
21. Release the finisher connector after removing 1 24. Release the bracket rear cover after removing
screw. 2 screws.
[G]
[G]
[G]
[G]
3-68
25. Release the bracket rear cover after removing 27. Lift up and release the duplex guide after
2 screws. removing 3 screws from the opposite side.
[I]
[I]
Connector
Connector
26. To remove the duplex guide [H], remove 28. Release the guide exit unit [I] after removing
3 screws. 4 screws and connector.
[H]
[H]
[I]
Connector
[H]
3-69
3.2.2.21 Mail box
1. Lift up Mail box Unit. 4. Remove the front cover. Separate the rear cover
after remove the harness.
2. Remove the Stacker. (4 ea)
5. Remove the jam cover.
3. Remove 2 screws to separate front/rear cover.
3-70
6. Remove the top cover after remove 4 screws. 8. To remove the Motor, remove 4 screws and 4
harness.
Top cover
Top cover
Top cover
Top cover
9. Remove the 2 SPUR Gear after remove screw.
7. pen the Assy Shiled TOP. If necessary, remove

switch or sensor.
Caution
When re-assembling, align the groove of both gear.
3-71
10. Separate the bracket and main board after 13. Remove 2 screws (green color) from the rear.
remove 5 screws.
14. Remove the ROLLER:STACKER.

11. Remove the SPUR Gear after remove screw.
15. Remove the SEPARATE:PAWL:FEED by

12. There are 3 Assy actuator shield. This manual unhooking the side.
describes disassembly procedure for middle
shield. Remove 2 screws (green color) from the
front.
3-72
16. Push the Assy actuator shield to the direction of 17. Done
arrow. And Separate it from the opposite side.
3-73
3.2.2.22 2-Bin Finisher
1. Unplug the connector. 3. Remove the staple cartridge.
2. Keep the 1c lever pull up and remove the 4. To remove the cover, remove the 2 screws.
finisher unit from the SET.
Top view
Top view
Top
Top view
view To
Bottom view
Bottom view
Bottom
Bottom view
view Bo
3-74
5. Remove the 3 screws. 7. Remove the 3 screws and take off the cover.
6. If some part such as sensor, switch in below

picture is defective, replace it.
8. If some part in below picture is defective, replace

it.
3-75
9. Remove the 4 screws from both side.
10. Open the cover and unplug the connector. 11. Remove the finisher board after remove the 3
screws.
3-76
12. Remove the 3 screws. 15. Remove the duplex guide.
13. Remove the 3 screws. 16. Remove the sensor.
14. Remove the 2 screws. 17. Remove the paddle.
3-77
18. Remove the 2 screws. 21. Open the top cover. If necessary, remove the
sensor.
19. Remove the 2 screws.
20. Remove the 2 screws.
3-78
3.2.3 Boards and Connectors

This section shows boards and connectors for connection error.
3.2.3.1 Video Board and Connectors
SATA IF SATA POWER

(CN 7) (CN 8)
SCAN IF 1 OPE
(CN16) (CN13)
OPE MAIN
SCAN IF 2
(CN12)
(CN18)
USB HOST
(CN14)
FAX IF
(CN 5) USB DEVICE
(CN15)
ENGINE IF
(CN17) MSOK IF
(CN11)
LAN
(CN 6)
FDI IF
(CN19)
CIP6 DEBUG
(CN10) SPGPV4 JTAG
(CN 4)
SPGPV4 DEBUG
(CN 3)
DDR2 EXTENSION DIMM / DDR2 BASE DIMM

Option (CN 2) (CN 1)
3-79
3.2.3.2 Engine Board and Connectors
BLDC FUSER BLDC OPC COVER OPEN-U THERMISTOR

(CN 5) (CN24) (CN 7) (CN 3)
STEP MOT (CN 4)
EXIT SENS (CN 6)
TB MT (CN102)
ENGINE PANEL
EXIT (CN 1) (CN 9)
BASE & DUPLEX ENGINE USB

(CN 8) (CN10)
ACR NEW (CN41) DEBUG (CN11)
T2 & BLDC ITB HVPS 3 (CN40)

(CN16)
BLDC DEVE (CN28)
ACR (CN15)
MAIN IF (CN12)
SMPS3 SIGNAL
(CN17) SMPS2 5V (CN20)
COVER OPEN-L HVPS 1 (CN25)

(CN18)
LSU P-MOTOR
CRUM IF (CN101) (CN21)
SMPS1 24V (CN23) LSU 3&4 (CN22)
BLDC BK (CN26) LSU 1&2 (CN34)
CLUTCHS (CN29) REGI SENS (CN31)
MP (CN38) LSU TEMP (CN100)
T1 ENG SENS WASTE MOT &

(CN35) LSU CLN (CN39)
SCF (CN32) HVPS 2 (CN33)
DEVE CRUM (CN77) DUPLEX & TOP SENS FINISHER FAN & FUSER & HUMI
(CN30) (CN37) (CN27)
3-80
3.2.3.3 OP Board and Connectors
OPE MAIN IF 2 KEY INTERFACE

(CN2) (CN3)
OPE MAIN IF 1
(CN1)
KEY SUB (CN4)
BACK LIGHT
(CN7)
TOUCH PAD
(CN8)
LCD INTERFACE HYPER JTAG

(CN6) (CN9) (CN12)
3-81
3.2.3.4 SMPS Board and Connectors
INPUT AC
(CON1)
OUTPUT 24V1/2/3/4
(CON2)
CONTROL SIGNAL
(CON4)
OUTPUT 5V1/2/3
(CON3)
3.2.3.5 FDB Board and Connectors
INLET AC FUSER CONTROL SMPS AC FUSER AC

(CON2) (CON1) (CON3) (CON4)
3-82
3.2.3.6 HVPS-L Board and Connectors
T2
T1 Y/M/C/K
(CN8)
HVPS 2
(CN2)
HVPS 1
(CN1)
FAN_LSU
(CN3)
WTB FULL SENS

(CN4)
MHV (AC+DC) C/K

(CN6)
MHV (AC+DC) Y/M

(CN5)
3.2.3.7 HVPS-S Board and Connectors
SAWPLATE FUSER BIAS HVPS 3 DEVE Y/M/C/K

(CN3) (CN4) (CN5) (CN2)
3-83
Troubleshooting
4. Troubleshooting
4.1 Paper jam
- Paper Path
Simplex Pass
Finisher Pass Duplex Pass
MP Feed
Cassette Feed
4-1
Troubleshooting
4.1.1 Paper jam and clearing intruction

If a paper jam is occurred, the corresponding error message appears. In the LCD display. Find and remove
the jammed paper. If you don’t see the paper, open the covers. Do not use a tweezers, pincers or other metal
tools when clearing a paper jam. This could damage the internal mechanism causing print quality problems
or possibly electrical shock.
■ JAM type
DADF Unit Scanner Unit
Duplex Jam 1
Duplex Unit
Jam 2
Toner Cartridge Duplex Jam 2
Cartridge-Transfer Unit
Imaging
-Drum Unit
Unit
Jam 1
LSU Unit
Standard tray
Jam 0
4-2
Troubleshooting
■ Description of JAM types and instruction
Jam 0
Leading edge of media does not arrive at Regi sensor within a programmed period of
Case
time after pick-Up (If fails at a time, it tries pick-up again)
1. Pull out the cassette 2. Remove a jammed paper
JAM Removal Or
1. Open side cover 2. Lift up Frame-Feed_Idle_Roller 3. Remove jammed paper
Feed Roller
Feed Roller
JAM Layout Pick-Up

Pick-Up
Photo
JAM1 / Duplex JAM0

Leading edge of media does not arrive at Exit Sensor within a programmed period of
time after regi sensor
Case Or
Leading edge of media does not arrive at Exit Sensor within a programmed period of
time after touching Duplex Ready Sensor
JAM Removal Exit Sensor
1. Open side cover 2. Remove a jammed paper Exit Sensor
Fuser Fuser
Exit Sensor Exit Sensor
Fuser Fuser
ITB ITB
ITB T2 ITB T2
JAM Layout
Registration T2 Registration T2
Regi Sensor Regi Sensor
Registration Registration
Regi Sensor Regi Sensor
Photo
4-3
Troubleshooting
JAM 2
Trailing edge of media does not pass Exit Sensor within a programmed period of time
Case
after touching Regi Sensor
1. Open side cover 2. Remove a jammed paper
JAM Removal Or
1. Remove jammed paper from exit
Exit Sensor
JAM Layout Exit Sensor
Fuser
Fuser
Photo
DUPLEX JAM1
Trailing edge of media passed Exit Sensor, but has not been arrived at Duplex Jam1
Case
Sensor
1. Open side cover 2. Remove a jammed paper
JAM Removal Or
1. Remove jammed paper from exit
Duplex Jam1 Sensor
Duplex Jam1 Sensor
Exit Sensor
JAM Layout
Exit Sensor
Fuser
Fuser
Photo
4-4
Troubleshooting
DUPLEX JAM 2
Trailing edge of media passed Exit sensor, but has not been arrived Duplex jam1
Case
sensor within a certain time
1. Open Side Cover
JAM Removal
2. Remove a jammed paper Duplex Jam1 Sensor
Duplex Jam1 Sensor

Exit Sensor
Fuser
Exit Sensor
Fuser
JAM Layout Duplex

T2 Duplex
T2
Regi Roller
Regi Roller
Duplex Ready Sensor
Duplex Ready Sensor
Photo
4-5
Troubleshooting
4.1.2.1 Tips for avoiding paper jams
By selecting the specified media types, most paper jams can be avoided.
• Ensure that the adjustable guides are positioned as specified.

• Do not overload the tray. Ensure that the paper level is below the paper capacity mark on the inside of the
tray.
• Do not remove papers from the tray while your machine is printing.
• Flex, fan, and straighten papers before loading.
• Do not use creased, damp, or highly curled paper.
• Do not mix paper types in a tray.
• Use only recommended types and sizes of print media.
• Ensure that the recommended side of the print media is facing up in the trays but facing down in the multi-
purpose tray.
• If paper jams occur frequently when you print on A5/B5-sized paper: Load the paper into the tray with the
long edge facing the front of the tray. If load the paper this way, printing both sides of the paper (Duplex) is
not supported.
4-6
Troubleshooting
4.1.2.2 Clearing original document jams
When an original jams while passing through the DADF, the warming message appears on the display
screen.
1. Remove any remaining pages from the DADF. Misfeed of exiting paper
2. Open the DADF cover. 1. Remove the remaining documents from the
DADF.
2. Open the DADF cover.
3. Gently remove the jammed paper from the

DADF.
3. Open the document input tray upwards and pull

the document gently out of the DADF.
4. Close the DADF cover. Then reload the pages

you removed, if any, in the DADF.
4. Close the DADF cover and the document input

tray. Then place the documents back in the
DADF.
4-7
Troubleshooting
Roller misfeed 4. Remove the paper from the feed area by

carefully pulling.
1. Open the scanner lid.
2. Grasp the misfed paper, and remove the paper

from the feed area by carefully pulling it to the
right using both hands.
5. Close the white document background and the

scanner lid. Then load the removed pages back
1 scanner lid into the DADF.
if you do not see the paper in this area, stop and

go to step 3.
1 scanner lid
3. Open the white document background.
4-8
Troubleshooting
4.1.2.3 Jam messages and clearing instructions
When a paper jam occurs, the warming message appears on the display screen. Refer to the table below to
locate and clear the paper jam.
Message Location of jam

Paper Jam in tray 1 In the paper feed area (tray 1, optional tray, or
Paper Jam in tray2 multi-purpose tray)
Paper Jam in tray 2(HCF)
Paper Jam in tray3
Paper Jam in MP tray
Paper Jam in exit area In the paper inside the machine
Paper Jam inside of machine In the fuser area
Paper Jam at the bottom of duplex path In the duplex unit
Paper Jam at the top of duplex path
Paper Jam inside of duplex path
Paper jam in front of finisher Paper jammed in the stacker.
Paper jam inside finisher
Paper jam at exit of finisher Paper jammed in the stacker exit part.
Paper jam inside finisher’s duplex Paper jammed in the stacker.
In the tray 1 2. Open the guide in the direction shown.
4-9
Troubleshooting
3. Carefully remove the misfed paper in the 5. Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it
direction shown. straight out.
If the paper does not move when you pull, or if Once you remove the jammed paper here, open
you do not see any paper in this area, stop and the side cover and then close it to clear the error
go to step 4. message on the display.
4. Lift the front part of the tray up slightly to release 6. Close the side cover and insert the paper tray.
the tray from the machine. Lower the rear part of the Tray to align the rear
edge with the corresponding slot of the machine,
then insert it completely.
4-10
Troubleshooting
In the optional tray 4. Lift the front part of the tray slightly up to release
the tray from the machine.
1. Open the outer cover in tray 2.
If the paper does not move when you pull, or if

2. Open the inner cover of tray 2. you do not see the paper in this area, stop and
go to step 3.
5. Remove the paper in the direction shown. To

avoid tearing the paper, pull it out gently and
slowly.
3. Pull the jammed paper out in the direction

shown. To avoid tearing the paper, pull it out
gently and slowly.
6. Insert the paper tray and close the two covers.
If the paper does not move when you pull, or if

you do not see any paper in this area, stop and
go to step 4.
4-11
Troubleshooting
In the optional high capacity feeder 3. Pull the jammed paper out, in the direction
shown, pulling gently and slowly in order to avoid
1. Open the outer cover of the high capacity feeder. tearing the paper.
2. Open the inner cover of the high capacity feeder. If the paper does not move when you pull, or if
you do not see any paper in this area, stop and
go to step 4.
4. Pull out the optional high capacity feeder.
5. Lift the front part of the tray slightly up to release

the tray from the machine.
4-12
Troubleshooting
6. Remove the paper in the direction shown. Pull In the multi-purpose tray
it out gently and slowly in order to avoid tearing
the paper. 1. If the paper is not feeding properly, pull the
paper out of the machine.
If the jammed paper is not visible, or if the paper

is stuck, stop pulling and continue on to step 5.
2. Open and close the side cover. Printing
7. Insert the paper tray and close the two covers. automatically resumes.
4-13
Troubleshooting
In the paper inside the machine 3. Open the guide in the direction shown and pull
the jammed paper gently out of the machine.
4. Open and close the front cover to resume

2. Remove the jammed paper, in the direction printing.
shown.
If you do not see any paper in this area, go to

step 3.
4-14
Troubleshooting
In the fuser area In the duplex unit area
1. Open the side cover. If the duplex unit is not inserted correctly, paper
jam may occur. Make sure that the duplex unit is
2. Remove the jammed paper, in the direction inserted correctly.
shown.
2. Release the guide to pull the jammed paper

easily.
3. Close the side cover. Printing automatically

resumes.
3. Remove the jammed paper.
4. Close the side cover.
4-15
Troubleshooting
In the stacker (finisher) Paper jam inside finisher, Paper jam inside
finisher’s duplex
Paper jam in front of finisher
1. Open the stacker front cover.
1. Open the stacker front cover.
2. Pull the stacker lever 1a down. If necessary, pull

the stacker lever 1b down as well.
2. Press right of 1c lever and then push stacker to
left.
4. Slide in the stacker until you hear the sound

‘click’.
5. Close the stacker front cover.
4-16
Troubleshooting
4. Pull up on the stacker lever and then close the Paper jam at exit of finisher
stacker front cover.
1. Gently pull the paper out through the exit area.
2. Close the side cover. Printing automatically

resumes.
4-17
Troubleshooting
4.2 Firmware Upgrade

• Firmware upgrade can be performed using USB or network port.
• Network applications (SWAS, SWS) can be used for network port upgrade.
4.2.1 Using the common method

① Unplug the network cable and fax (Tel) cable.
② Download the firmware file in the temporary folder. And unzip the file.
③ Delete all current jobs from Job Status window
④ Connect USB cable in the machine (idle state)
Drag and Drop
⑤ Send firmware file( *.hd ) by usblist2

-D
rag the f/w file and Drop down on the usbprn2.exe. And then f/w update will be started automatically.
⑥ Please wait until end reboot.
4-18
Troubleshooting
4.2.2 F/W upgrade using SWAS (SyncThru Web Admin Service)

- Start the SWAS program.
(Windows Start menu > Programs > Samsung Netowork Printer Utilities > SyncThru Web Admin Service)
① Firmware Upgrade → Upgrade (check device using IP address)
1
1
1
2
2
2 3
3
3
② Maintenance → Firmware upload (register firmware)
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
③ Maintenance → Firmware Upload (upload firmware)
1
1
1
2
2 3
2 3
3
4
4
4
4-19
Troubleshooting
④ Maintenance → Firmware Upload (confirm uploaded firmware)
1
1
2 1
2 3
3
2
3
⑤ Maintenance → Firmware Upgrade → Upgrade (choose firmware)
1
1
2 1
2 3
2 3
⑥ Maintenance → Firmware Upgrade → Upgrade (choose firmware)

1
1
2 1
2
3
3
4-20
Troubleshooting
⑦ Maintenance → Firmware Upgrade → Upgrade
1
1
2
3
2
3
4
4
⑧ Maintenance → Firmware Upgrade → Upgrade (Done)
1
1
2
2 3
3
4-21
Troubleshooting
4.3 Diagnostic mode (Tech mode)
4.3.1 Diagnostic mode menu
4.3.1.1 Instruction
This document will capture the behavior specifications for the GUI Windows for Diagnostics. Each section of
this document describes one feature with a step window image and script.
However, used window image is not fixed image from the specification point of view. Acquire detail
information from script. Window image is just example image will be implemented.
4.3.1.2 How to enter diagnostics mode
1. Press 1,2,3 buttons on numerical key simultaneously.

2. Enter password(1934).
3. Press ‘OK’ button.
4-22
Troubleshooting
4.3.1.3 How to exit diagnostics mode
By pressing the Home button, exit Diagnostics mode.

When exit Diagnostics mode, a popup window shall display.
By default, Reset Counters is No, Reboot Copier is Yes.
- Reset Counter
If you select “Yes” for Reset counter, the count of Image since last call will reset. This item is to count the
printed pages since last service.
- Reboot Copier
It doesn’t matter that you select “Yes” or “No”. The new settings in diagnostics mode will be applied to the
product . It is not necessary to select “Yes”.
4-23
Troubleshooting
4.3.2 Diagnostics menu map
Information Fault History
General Fault Log

Machine Serial number Fault Counters
Network IP Address
Images since last call
Service started
HFSI Test Rountines
Software version
Usage Counters
Copier
NVM Read/Write
NVM Initialization
Engine/DADF Test Routines
Fax
NVM Read/Write
NVM Initialization
Fax Routines
Protocol Report
Network
NVM Initialization
Other
Print Test Pattern
Shading Test
Scan Edge Test
Memory Clear
Print Report
Reset Admin. Password
Format HDD
Engine Memory clear
Manual Adjust
Fine Edge
ACR Sensor Calibration
Extend Image Unit Life
Fast Print
Report Color Print
4-24
Troubleshooting
4.3.3 Information tab

Information tab provides detail information of the machine.
General
• Diagnostics>Information>General
• When user selects General, OP displays Machine Serial Number, Network IP Address and Images since
last call.
HFSI (High Frequency Service Items)
• Diagnostics>Information>HFSI
• W
hen user selects General, OP displays the list of HFSI( High Frequency Service Items) read from the
MCB.
In the list, there are “ Item”, “Status”, “Actual”, and “Max Life”.
4-25
Troubleshooting
• User selection
- User can select one item in the list to reset the counter using “Reset” button or to edit the Max.Life and
threshold value using “Edit” button.
• Items in this column are:

DADF Roller / Rubber Pad Life Page
T1/T2/T3 P-up Roller Life Page
Retard Roller Life Page
Bypass Rubber Pad Life page
Transfer Roller Life Page
Fuser Roller / Fuser Unit Life Page
Heat Roller Life Page
Pressure Roller Life Page
• Status
- The possible values in this column are ‘OK’, ‘Check’, ‘Negative’ and ‘Off’.
- OK : Actual counter is smaller than the threshold value
- Check : Actual counter is bigger than threshold value but smaller than Max.Life
- Off : Actual counter exceeds Max.Life
- Negative : There is no counter to display. In this case, it shall display ‘-‘ in the
Status and Max Life column.
• Actual
- Values in this column are actual counts for HFSI usage
• Max. Life
Values in this column are maximum life limits set for HFSI.
• Reset
This button is used to reset the actual counter after replacing the HFSI unit.
This button is disabled before user select one item in the list and enabled once user select any of the items
in the list.
Once user presses, a confirmation window shall display to user confirm again. The window is displayed as
below.
If user confirms reset, it will reset the counter to 0.
If the counter of selected item is 0, ‘Reset’ button shall be disabled.
4-26
Troubleshooting
• Edit
“Edit” button is disabled until user select one item in the list.
Selecting “Edit” button causes edit window to be displayed.
There are two input filed for ‘Maximum Life’ and for ‘Threshold’.
Each data field shall display default value or the last-saved value entered by the service engineer. The data
field shall support the numeric characters of 0 to 9.
The hard keypad characters of ‘#’, ‘phone’ and ‘*’ are not supported and shall generate an invalid entry
message if selected.
The hard keypad characters of ‘c’ shall delete all characters displayed within the selected data field. By
selecting ‘Cancel’, window moves back to HSFI window without saving user’s setting. By selecting ‘OK’
button, window moves back to HSFI window saving user’s setting. Threshold value shall not be greater than
Maximum Life.
Software Version
• Diagnostics>Information>Software Version
• When user selects Software version, OP displays the version of the Main Controller, Image Output Terminal,
User Interface, Network Controller, Document Feeder, Tray 2 Firmware, Tray 3 Firmware
4-27
Troubleshooting
Usage Counter
• Diagnostics>Information>Usage Counter
• When user selects Usage Counter, OP displays the amount of the Items shown below.
• Total Impressions • Color Copied 2-Sided Sheets

• Black Impressions • DADF Scan Page Counts
• Black Copied Impressions • Platen Scan Page Counts
• Black Printed Impressions • Printed 2 Sided Sheets
• Color Impressions • Black Printed 2 Sided Sheets
• Color Copied Impressions • Color Printed 2 Sided Sheets
• Sheets • Network Scanning Images Sent
• Copied Sheets • Email Images Sent
• Black Copied Sheets • Maintenance Impressions
• Color Copied Sheets • Black Maintenance Impressions
• Printed Sheets • Known Jams in the IOT
• Black Printed Sheets • Known Jams in Finishing Device(s)
• Color Printed Sheets • Attempted Sheet feeds from Internal trays
• 2 Sided Sheets • Actual sheet feeds from Internal trays
• Copied 2 Sided Sheets • Normal Level Power On Hours
• Black Copied 2 Sided Sheets • Power Save Hours
• Attempted Original Sheet Feeds in the DADF
• Jammed paper in the DADF
※ IOT : Image Out Total
4-28
Troubleshooting
4.3.4 Fault history tab

Fault History provides an error information occurred.
Fault Log
• Diagnostics>Fault History>Fault Log

• Fault log window shall display errors occurred while the product was operating.
• Diagnostics>Fault History>Fault Log>Clear

• When selecting “Clear” button, Pop-up will be displayed. If you want to delete the Fault history, touch the “OK”
button.
4-29
Troubleshooting
Fault Counters
• Diagnostics>Fault History>Fault Counters

• Fault counters window displays Fault group with number and name.
They are
• 01 Feeder • 10 Controller
• 02 Fuser • 14 Cloning
• 03 Motor Fan • 25 CRU_C
• 04 LSU • 26 CRU_M
• 06 CRU • 27 CRU_Y
• 07 Finisher • 28 CRU_MISC
• 08 DADF • 29 EP
User shall select one item in the list at a time and multiple selection shall not supported. User can select ‘Non
Zero’ or ‘All’. By default, ‘Non Zero’ shall be selected.
When press ‘OK’, Fault Counters Detail Window shall be displayed.
4-30
Troubleshooting
Fault Counters Detail window shall display Fault code, description and value (counter) among the selected
Fault Group. Items of displayed Fault codes are different based on the selection of ‘Non Zero’ or ‘All’. When
selected ‘Non Zero’, Fault codes in the selected Fault Group having non zero counter shall be displayed.
When selected ‘All’, all Fault codes in the selected Fault Group shall be displayed. Display order of Fault
code is upward.
4.3.5 Test routines tab
4.3.5.1 Copier
NVM Read/Write
• Diagnostics>Test Routines>Copier>NVM Read/Write
“Edit” button shall be disabled until any NVM item is selected.

“Edit” button shall be disabled when read only NVM is selected. Search edit box has 00-000 as a default.
User shall input the whole number to find a specific NVM by pressing Find button. (Refer to NVM Read/Write
table) If matching NVM is found, the page including the specified NVM shall be displayed and the NVM is
shown as selected. If matching NVM is not found, error message such as “Invalid NVM number” shall be
displayed on the status area and search edit box displays default number.
4-31
Troubleshooting
• Diagnostics>Test Routines>Copier>NVM Read/Write>Edit
• NVRAM Read / Write code table
0~4 Reserved
5 DADF
6~19 Reserved
20 FAX
100 Engine(Motor)
101 Engine(Clutch & Actuator)
102 Engine(Paper Handling)
103 Engine(Timing)
104 Engine(Consumables)
105 Engine(Charger)
106 Engine(Developer)
107 Engine(Transfer)
108 Engine(Environment)
109 Engine(Fixing)
110 Engine(LSU)
111 Engine(Toner)
112 Engine(ACR)
113 Engine(Option/Finisher)
114 Engine(Option/SCF)
115 Engine(Option/Reserved)
117 Engine(CTD)
118~255 Reserved
4-32
Troubleshooting
NVM Description Max

Code Default Function Description
(GUI) / Min
102-000 Top Registration Tray1 3 6/0 *Y
ou can adjust the Top Margin of simplex copy image for each
Simplex tray.
102-010 Top Registration Tray2 3 6/0 *T
he input value is reflected to the real image and it is equal to
Simplex mm.
* In case, the value is more than 3 :
102-020 Top Registration Tray3 3 6/0
Simplex copy top margin lengthen.
Simplex
For example, if the value is 6, top margin lengthen 3 mm.
102-040 Top Registration Bypass 3 6/0
* In case, the value is less than 3 :
Simplex
Simplex copy top margin shorten.
For example, if the value is 0, top margin shorten 3 mm.
ou can adjust the Top Margin of duplex image of duplex copy
Dup_long (2nd side) for each tray.
he input value is reflected to the real image and it is same with
Dup_long (2nd side) mm size.
Top Margin of duplex image of duplex copy lengthen.
Dup_long (2nd side)
Dup_long (2nd side)
Top Margin of duplex image of duplex copy shorten.
ou can adjust the Top Margin of simplex image of duplex copy
Duplex (1st side) for each tray.
he input value is reflected to the real image and it is same with
Duplex (1st side) mm size.
Simplex image top margin of duplex copy lengthen.
Duplex (1st side)
Duplex (1st side)
Simplex image top margin of duplex copy shorten.
103-000 Pick Up Start Time 30 1000/0 * Pick up start time value
* You can read the value only.
103-010 Regi Off Time 92 500/0 * Regi Off Time value
103-021 Option Clutch On Time 8 100/0 * Option clutch on time value
104-000 Pick up roller Life Page 0 100000 * Tray1 Pick up roller Page Counter value
Counter /0 * When replacing a svc part, you can change the count to 0.
104-030 T2 Pick-Up Roller Life 0 100000 * Tray2 Pick up roller Page Counter value
Page Counter /0 * When replacing a svc part, you can change the count to 0.
104-040 T3 Pick-Up Roller Life 0 100000 * Tray3 Pick up roller Page Counter value
4-33
Troubleshooting
NVM Description Max

(GUI) / Min
104-060 Bypass Rubber Pad Life 0 100000 * MP Tray Pick up roller Page Counter value
105-000 MHV DC Yellow 425 1000 * This value is to set the DC component in the charge voltage for
/100 charging the OPC surface.
105-010 MHV DC Magenta 425 1000 * Default 425 PWM is approximately -706V
/100 * The voltage changes +2.05v per +1 PWM.
* In case of NN, the surface of OPC is charged by approximately
105-020 MHV DC Cyan 425 1000
-600V.
/100
* This value is to check the normal state of HVPS,LSU.
105-030 MHV DC Black (MHV 425 1000
* The value set on EDC manually is not applied to the real printing.
Bias Control) /100
* At real printing, the value is applied by the Look-Up Table
considering the environment and life automatically.
105-040 MHV DC Low Yellow 440 1000 * In case of OPC idling, this value is to make the lower charge
/100 voltage on OPC surface.
105-050 MHV DC Low Magenta 440 1000 *D
efault 440 PWM is approximately -736V that makes
/100 approximately -100V charge voltage.
* The voltage changes +2.05v per +1 PWM.
105-060 MHV DC Low Cyan 440 1000
/100
105-070 MHV DC Low Black 440 1000
*A
t real printing, the value is applied by the Look-Up Table
/100
105-080 MHV VPP Yellow 134 250/30 * T
his value is to set the AC component in the charge voltage for
105-090 MHV VPP Magenta 134 250/30 charging the OPC surface.
* Default 134 PWM is approximately -2.28KVpp
105-100 MHV VPP Cyan 134 250/30
* The voltage changes +13.5Vpp per +1 PWM.
105-110 MHV VPP Black 134 250/30
105-120 MHV AC Yellow 128 160/100 * T
his PWM value is to set +/- rate of AC component for charging
105-130 MHV AC Magenta 128 160/100 the OPC surface.
* Default 128 PWM is 50% Duty
105-140 MHV AC Cyan 128 160/100
105-150 MHV AC Black 128 160/100
*A
106-000 Deve DC Yellow 152 200/90 * This PWM value is to set the develping DC that toner of magnetic
106-010 Deve DC Magenta 152 200/90 roll is developed on OPC.
* Default 152 PWM is approximately -500V.
106-020 Deve DC Cyan 152 200/90
* The voltage changes +4.0V per +1 PWM.
106-030 Deve DC Black (Deve 152 200/90
Bias Control)
4-34
Troubleshooting
NVM Description Max

(GUI) / Min
107-000 Transfer1 High 65 100/50 * T1 Transfer current (Y,M,C,Bk-Pod) PWM Duty
Voltage(THV) Yellow * This is the high voltage to transfer the toner image on OPC to
107-010 Transfer1 High 65 100/50 the ITB.
Voltage(THV) Magenta * When perfoming the CTD or ACR, it is the same for tranfering
the compensating patch on ITB.
107-020 Transfer1 High 65 100/50
* Current(T1) = 0.1736 * PWM - 3.1603
Voltage(THV) Cyan
* This value is the only initial setting of default PWM Duty for the
107-030 Transfer1 High 65 100/50
first transfer.
Voltage(THV) Black (THV
Bias Control)
107-040 Transfer1 High 53 100/50 * T1 Protection current (Y,M,C,Bk-Pod) PWM Duty
Voltage(THV) Low * This is the high voltage to ensure the output stability of HVPS for
Yellow no-image area on OPC.
107-050 Transfer1 High 53 100/50 * Current(T1) = 0.1736 * PWM - 3.1603
Voltage(THV) Low * At real printing, the value is applied by the Look-Up Table
Magenta considering the environment and life automatically. It never
change.
107-060 Transfer1 High 53 100/50
Voltage(THV) Low Cyan
107-070 Transfer1 High 53 100/50
Voltage(THV) Low Black
107-080 Transfer2 High 140 160/65 * T2 transfer current (Simplex printing side) PWM Duty
Voltage(THV2) *T
his is the high voltage to transfer the toner image on ITB to the
paper for second transfer.
*T
his is the second transfer high voltage for simplex printing side
that doesn't pass the fuser.
* Current(T2) = 0.2654 x PWM - 9.0191
*A
107-090 Transfer2 High 80 160/65 * T2 transfer current (Duplex printing side) PWM Duty
Voltage(THV2) Duplex *T
his is the high voltage to transfer the toner image on ITB to the
paper for second transfer.
*T
his is the second transfer high voltage for duplex printing side
that pass the fuser.
* Current(T2) = 0.2654 x PWM - 9.0191
107-100 PreTransfer1 Duty 74 100/50 * T1 transfer system Load recognition current PWM Duty
*T
his is the high voltage to recognize the total impedance of T1
transfer system that pass the T1 roller rubber, ITB, OPC.
* Current(T1) = 0.1736 * PWM - 3.1603
*A
4-35
Troubleshooting
NVM Description Max

(GUI) / Min
107-110 PreTransfer2 Duty 105 160/65 * T
2 transfer system Load recognition current PWM Duty
This is the high voltage to recognize the total impedance of T2
transfer system that pass the T2 roller rubber, ITB, OPC
* Current(T2) = 0.2654 x PWM - 9.0191
107-120 Saw Plate Duty (Detack 90 110/1 * Eraser high voltage PWM Duty of the rear paper
Bias Control) * After second transfer, this high voltage erases the static
electricity from the rear paper.
* (Saw eraser Bias) = -8.4237 x (PWM) + 315.3
109-050 60 gms Temperature 7 14/0 * Fusing temperature variableness of Thin type paper
offset * Default temperature : 170℃
* Range of variableness : 177 ~ 163℃ (170℃ +/- 7℃)
The fuser temperature increases (input value-7)℃ than 170℃
The fuser temperature decreases (7-input value)℃ than 170℃
109-060 90 gms Temperature 7 14/0 * Fusing temperature variableness of Plain type paper
109-070 Bond Temperature offset 7 14/0 * Fusing temperature variableness of Bond type paper
* Default temperature : 150℃
109-080 Transparency 7 12/2 * Fusing temperature variableness of Transparency type paper
Temperature offset * Default temperature : 150 ℃
4-36
Troubleshooting
NVM Description Max

(GUI) / Min
109-090 Cardstock Temperature 7 14/0 * Fusing temperature variableness of Cardstock type paper
offset * Default temperature : 150 ℃
109-100 Envelopes Temperature 7 14/0 * Fusing temperature variableness of Envelope type paper
offset * Range of variableness : 157 ~ 143℃ (150℃ +/- 7℃)
109-110 Labels Temperature 7 14/0 * Fusing temperature variableness of Label type paper
109-120 Fuser Bias Duty 154 194/154 * Fuser Bias PWM
* Read only
* You can't chage this value. ( HH condition : 194 / Other : 154 )
109-130 Thick Temperature 7 14/0 * Fusing temperature variableness of Label type paper
Offset * Default temperature : 150℃
110-000 LD Power Yellow(Half) 88 250/10 * This PWM sets the laser intensity to be shoot on OPC.
110-010 LD Power Magenta(Half) 88 250 /10 (This value is used at half speed that the process speed of OPC
is the half of normal condition )
110-020 LD Power Cyan(Half) 88 250 /10
* Default 88 PWM is approximately 0.223mW.
110-030 LD Power Black(Half) 88 250 /10
* This value changes +0.0026mw per +1 PWM.
4-37
Troubleshooting
NVM Description Max

(GUI) / Min
110-040 LD Power Yellow 100 250/10 * This PWM sets the laser intensity to be shoot on OPC.
110-050 LD Power Magenta 95 250/10 * Default 100, 95 PWM are approximately 0.254mW, 0.241mW.
* This value changes +0.0026mw per +1 PWM.
110-060 LD Power Cyan 95 250/10
110-070 LD Power Black (LD 95 250/10
Light Level Black)
*A
111-000 Toner Vcon Yellow 175 255/90 * T
his value is the TC sensor control voltage PWM to adjust the
111-010 Toner Vcon Magenta 175 255/90 toner density.
*D
efault is 175. But, if the new imaging unit is installed, PWM will
111-020 Toner Vcon Cyan 175 255/90
be changed after TC Sensor Initialization.
111-030 Toner Vcon Black 175 255/90
* Default 175 PWM is approximately 8.15V.
* This value changes 0.01V per +1 PWM.
*T
his value is to check the normal state of the toner density
sensor output.
*A
111-060 Toner T/C Upper Limit 5 100/0 * This value is the ADC to control the toner density.
Yellow * 5 ADC (for initial toner only) is the target+0.5wt%(9.0wt%)
111-070 Toner T/C Upper Limit 5 100/0 * The more the value increase, the more the toner density
Magenta increase.
111-080 Toner T/C Upper Limit 5 100/0

Cyan
111-090 Toner T/C Upper Limit 5 100/0
Black
111-100 Toner T/C Lower Limit 140 250/10 * This value is the ADC to contol the toner density.
Yellow * 140 ADC(for initial toner only) is the Target -1wt% (7.5 wt%).
111-110 Toner T/C Lower Limit 140 250/10 * The more the value decrease, the more the toner density
Magenta decrease.
111-120 Toner T/C Lower Limit 140 250/10

Cyan
111-130 Toner T/C Lower Limit 140 250/10
Black
111-140 Toner Target Yellow 128 250/10 * This value is the ADC to control the toner density.
111-150 Toner Target Magenta 128 250/10 * In case of 128 ADC (for initial toner only), toner density is
8.5wt%.
111-160 Toner Target Cyan 128 250/10
* The more the value increase, the more the toner density
111-170 Toner Target Black 128 250/10
decrease.
* The more the value decrease, the more the toner density
increase.
* You must input the value less than lower limit.
4-38
Troubleshooting
NVM Description Max

(GUI) / Min
112-000 Total Condition On/Off 1 1/0 * ACR ON/OFF
for ACR (TRUE) * 1 (On) (Default) / 0 (OFF)
112-0060 LSU Temp Pattern Count Fixed Fixed The Pattern Count for LSU Temperature of ACR
for ACR value value
112-0070 New Crum Pattern Count Fixed Fixed The Pattern Count for New Crum of ACR
for ACR value value
112-0080 Page Count Pattern Fixed Fixed The Pattern Count for Page Count of ACR
Count for ACR value value
112-090 Inner Temperature for 3 30/1 * ACR performance temperature condition for inside temperature
ACR changes of the product. (Unit : ℃)
Ex) In case that the value is 3.
-> If the inside temperatrue change 3℃, ACR will start.
* The frequency of ACR performance is related to the regi error.
* The more you operates ACR, the less the regi error decrease.
112-100 LSU Temperature for 3 30/1 * ACR performance temperature condition for inside temperature
ACR changes of the LSU. (Unit : ℃)
Ex) In case that the value is 3.
-> If the inside temperatrue of LSU change 3℃, ACR will start.
112-110 Page Count for ACR 500 5000 ACR performance setting for printed pages.
/200 EX ) In case that the value is 500
-> Whenever 500 pages are printed, ACR will start.
4-39
Troubleshooting
NVM Description Max

(GUI) / Min
112-120 Manual Color Regi 100 200/0 *P
rimary scanning direction offset compared with Black for
X-offset Yellow yellow. (Unit : dot )
* Primary scanning direction : Vertical direction for paper transfer
*O
ffset value changes on the contrary because turning the
polygon mirror of LSU is the oppsite between Y/C color and M/K
color.
Primary scanning direction of yellow moves to left than black.
Primary scanning direction of yellow moves to right than black.
112-121 Reset All Offsets for 100 200/0 Reset all offsets to default.
ACR
rimary scanning direction offset compared with Black for
X-offset Magenta magenta. (Unit : dot )
Primary scanning direction of magenta moves to left than black.
Primary scanning direction of magenta moves to right than
black.
4-40
Troubleshooting
NVM Description Max

(GUI) / Min
rimary scanning direction offset compared with Black for Cyan.
X-offset Cyan (Unit : dot )
Primary scanning direction of cyan moves to left than black.
Primary scanning direction of cyan moves to right than black.
112-150 Manual Color Regi 100 100/100 * Black is a standard. So you can't change the value.
X-offset Black
112-160 Manual Color Regi 100 200/0 *S
econdary scanning direction offset compared with Black for
Y-offset Yellow Yellow. (Unit : dot)
*S
econdary scanning direction : Horizontal direction for paper
transfer
Secondary scanning direction of yellow moves to bottom than
black.
Secondary scanning direction of yellow moves to top than black.
4-41
Troubleshooting
NVM Description Max

(GUI) / Min
112-170 Manual Color Regi 100 200/0 *S
econdary scanning direction offset compared with Black for
Y-offset Magenta Magenta. (Unit : dot)
Secondary scanning direction of magenta moves to bottom than
black.
Secondary scanning direction of magenta moves to top than
black.
112-180 Manual Color Regi 100 200/0 * Secondary scanning direction offset compared with Black for
Y-offset Cyan Cyan. (Unit : dot)
Secondary scanning direction of cyan moves to bottom than black.
Secondary scanning direction of cyan moves to top than black.
112-190 Manual Color Regi 100 100/100 * Black is a standard. So you can't change the value.
Y-offset Black
4-42
Troubleshooting
NVM Description Max

(GUI) / Min
112-200 Manual Color Regi Width 100 200/0 *T
his vaule adjusts the primary scanning direction width of Yellow
Yellow color. It adjusts the left side based on the right of portrait (paper
direction).
Primary scanning direction width of yellow increases.
Primary scanning direction width of yellow decreases.

his vaule adjusts the primary scanning direction width of
Magenta Magenta color. It adjusts the right side based on the left of
portrait (paper direction).
Primary scanning direction width of magenta increases.
Primary scanning direction width of magenta decreases.
4-43
Troubleshooting
NVM Description Max

(GUI) / Min
his vaule adjusts the primary scanning direction width of Cyan
Cyan color. It adjusts the left side based on the right of portrait (paper
direction).
Primary scanning direction width of cyan increases.
Primary scanning direction width of cyan decreases.

his vaule adjusts the primary scanning direction width of Black
Black color. It adjusts the right side based on the left of portrait (paper
direction).
Primary scanning direction width of black increases.
Primary scanning direction width of black decreases.
05-100 DADF Top Edge Erase 2 4/0 * This value sets the Top Skip at DADF Copy.
* This value 1 means 1mm skip.
Top Skip at DADF copy increases.
Top Skip at DADF copy decreases.
4-44
Troubleshooting
NVM Description Max

(GUI) / Min
05-110 DADF Bottom Edge 2 4/0 * This value sets the Bottom Skip at DADF Copy.
Erase * This value 1 means 1mm skip.
Bottom Skip at DADF copy increases.
Bottom Skip at DADF copy decreases.
05-500 Platen Top Edge Erase 2 4/0 * This value sets the Top Skip at Platen Copy.
* This value 1 means 1mm skip.
Top Skip at Platen copy increases.
Top Skip at Platen copy decreases.
05-510 Platen Bottom Edge 2 4/0 * This value sets the Bottom Skip at Platen Copy.
Erase * This value 1 means 1mm skip.
Bottom Skip at Platen copy increases.
Bottom Skip at Platen copy decreases.
05-700 ADF Roller Life Page 0 100000 * DADF Pick up roller Page Counter
Counter /0 * When replacing a svc part, you can change the count to 0.
05-710 ADF Rubber Pad Life 0 100000 * DADF Rubber Pad Page Counter
4-45
Troubleshooting
4.3.5.2 NVM Initialization
• Diagnostics>Test Routines>Copier>NVM Initialization

• By default, none of items is selected and Initialize button shall be disabled.
There shall be Back button.
• Diagnostics>Test Routines>Copier>NVM Initialization>Initialize
If you want to initialize the NVM values, press OK button.

When press OK button, SR shall show the initialization progress status and result.
When the result is get, pop up window shall be disappeared.
4-46
Troubleshooting
4.3.5.3 Engine/DADF Test Routines
• Diagnostics>Test Routines>Copier>Engine/DADF Test Routines.
When exit this window, OP shall send exit command. (CMD_COPY_COMP_EXITMODE)

By default, all Test routines will be displayed.
By default, search edit box has 00 .
OK/Reset button shall be disabled until any test routine is selected.
Maximum number of selection is 3.
Reset will deselect all selected test routines.
User select test routine by touching the row and deselect touching it again.
User input chain number in search edit box and only all test routines in the chain shall be
displayed.
By default, Start/Stop/Stop All shall be disabled.

Start button shall be enabled when selected item is not running.
Multiple selection shall not be supported.
Stop shall be enabled only when the selected item is running.
Stop All shall be enabled when there is any running test item.
Back button shall be disable when there is any running test item.
4-47
Troubleshooting
• Engine Diagnostic Contol(EDC) Menu
0~4 Reserved
5 DADF
6~19 Reserved
20 FAX
100 Engine(Motor)
101 Engine(Clutch & Actuator)
102 Engine(Paper Handling)
103 Engine(Timing)
104 Engine(Consumables)
105 Engine(Charger)
106 Engine(Developer)
107 Engine(Transfer)
108 Engine(Environment)
109 Engine(Fixing)
110 Engine(LSU)
111 Engine(Toner)
112 Engine(ACR)
113 Engine(Option/Finisher)
114 Engine(Option/SCF)
117 Engine(CTD)
118~255 Reserved
Input / State
Code Displayed Name Meaning
Output Displayed
100-000 Main BLDC Motor Main BLDC Motor is On/Off Output On[Off]
100-010 Main BLDC Motor Ready Detect if Main BLDC Motor runs at normal speed Input High[Low]
100-020 Black OPC/DEV Motor Black OPC/DEV BLDC Motor is On/Off Output On[Off]
Detect if Black OPC/DEV BLDC Motor runs at normal
100-030 Black OPC/DEV Motor Ready Input High[Low]
speed
100-040 Color OPC Motor Color OPC BLDC Motor is On/Off Output On[Off]
100-050 Color OPC Motor Ready Detect if Color DEV BLDC Motor runs at normal speed Input High[Low]
100-060 Color DEV Motor Color DEV BLDC Motor is On/Off Output On[Off]
100-070 Color DEV Motor Ready Detect if Color DEV BLDC Motor runs at normal speed Input High[Low]
100-080 T1 Engage Motor T1 Engage Motor On/Off Output On[Off]
100-090 T1 Engae Sensor Detect if the T1 Engage is On or Off. Input High[Low]
100-100 T2 Engage Motor T2 Engage Motor On/Off Output On[Off]
4-48
Troubleshooting
Input / State
Output Displayed
100-110 T2 Engae Sensor Detect if the T1 Engage is On or Off. Input High[Low]
100-120 Exit Motor Forward Fast Exit Motor Forward Fast On/Off Output On[Off]
100-130 Exit Motor Forward Slow Exit Motor Forward Slow On/Off Output On[Off]
100-140 Duplex Motor Forward Duplex Motor Forward On/Off Output On[Off]
100-150 Duplex Motor Backward Duplex Motor Backward On/Off Output On[Off]
100-160 Duplex Fan1 Run Start/Stop Duplex Fan1 run Output On[Off]
100-170 Duplex Fan2 Run Start/Stop Duplex Fan2 run Output On[Off]
100-190 Dupelx Fan2 Run Ready Detects if Duplex Fan2 runs at normal speed. Input High[Low]
100-240 Waste Toner Motor Waste Toner Motor On/Off Output On[Off]
100-241 Waste Toner Led Waste Toner Led On/Off Output On[Off]
100-250 Waste Toner Full Sensor Detect if the waste toner is full or not. Input High[Low]
100-260 SMPS Fan Run Start/Stop Deve. Fan run Output On[Off]
100-270 SMPS Fan Run Ready Detects if Deve Fan runs at normal speed. Input High[Low]
Engages drive to pick up a paper from bypass Tray(MP
101-000 Bypass Feed Clutch Output On[Off]
Tray).
101-010 T1 Pick-Up Clutch Engages drive to pick up a paper from tray1. Output On[Off]
101-020 T2 Pick-Up Clutch Engages drive to pick up a paper from tray2. (Optional) Output On[Off]
101-030 T3 Pick-Up Clutch Engages drive to pick up a paper from tray3. (Optional) Output On[Off]
101-050 Registration Clutch Engages drive to registartion rolls. Output On[Off]
101-060 Duplex Feed Clutch Engages drive to feed a paper into duplex path. Output On[Off]
101-070 Duplex Gate Clutch Engages drive to convert paper direction into duplex path. Output On[Off]
101-080 T1 Feed Clutch T1 Feed Clutch On/Off Output On[Off]
101-170 Side Cover Interlock Detect if the side cover is opened or closed. Input Opened/Closed
101-190 Out-Bin Full Sensor Detect when a paper is at Duplex Ready sensor. Input High[low]
102-000 Tray1 Home Position Detect when tray1 is closed. Input Closed[Opened]
102-010 T1 Paper Empty Sensor Detect when paper is in Tray1. Input High[low]
102-020 T1 Size1 sensor Detects whether auto size1 sensor of tray1 is high or low. Input High[low]
102-050 T1 Stack Height Sensor Detects if paper in tray1 is elevated to the sensor. Input High[low]
102-060 T1 Paper Low Sensor Detects when the stack height of tray1 is less than 25%. Input High[low]
102-080 T2 Paper Empty Sensor Detect when paper is in tray2. Input High[low]
4-49
Troubleshooting
Input / State
Output Displayed
102-150 T3 Paper Empty Sensor Detect when paper is in tray3. Input High[low]
102-280 Bypass Paper Empty Sensor Detects when paper is in Bypass Tray(MP Tray). Input High[low]
102-290 Feed Sensor Detect when a paper is at Feed sensor. Input High[low]
102-360 Regi. Sensor Detect when a paper is at Regi. sensor. Input High[low]
102-370 Exit Sensor Detect when a paper is at Exit. sensor. Input High[low]
102-380 Duplex Jam1 Sensor Detect when a paper is at Duplex Jam1 sensor. Input High[low]
102-390 Duplex Jam2 Sensor Detect when a paper is at Duplex Jam2 sensor. Input High[low]
105-000 Yellow MHV Bias Yellow MHV bias voltage on at normal drive level Output On[Off]
105-010 Magenta MHV Bias Magenta MHV bias voltage on at normal drive level Output On[Off]
105-020 Cyan MHV Bias Cyan MHV bias voltage on at normal drive level Output On[Off]
105-030 Black MHV Bias Black MHV bias voltage on at normal drive level Output On[Off]
105-040 Yellow MHV Bias Read Yellow Detect what the MHV value is on the MHV Roller Output Numeric 3 digits
105-050 Magenta MHV Bias Read Magenta Detect what the MHV value is on the MHV Roller Output Numeric 3 digits
105-060 Cyan MHV Bias Read Cyan Detect what the MHV value is on the MHV Roller Output Numeric 3 digits
105-070 Black MHV Bias Read Black Detect what the MHV value is on the MHV Roller Output Numeric 3 digits
106-000 Yellow Dev Bias Yellow Dev bias voltage on at normal drive level Output On[Off]
106-010 Magenta Dev Bias Magenta Dev bias voltage on at normal drive level Output On[Off]
106-020 Cyan Dev Bias Cyan Dev bias voltage on at normal drive level Output On[Off]
106-030 Black Dev Bias Black Dev bias voltage on at normal drive level Output On[Off]
107-000 Yellow THV Bias Yellow THV bias voltage on at normal drive level Output On[Off]
107-010 Magenta THV Bias Magenta THV bias voltage on at normal drive level Output On[Off]
107-020 Cyan THV Bias Cyan THV bias voltage on at normal drive level Output On[Off]
107-030 Black THV Bias Black THV bias voltage on at normal drive level Output On[Off]
107-040 Yellow THV Bias Read Detect what the THV value is on the THV Roller Input Numeric 3 digits
107-050 Magenta THV Bias Read Detect what the THV value is on the THV Roller Input Numeric 3 digits
107-060 Cyan THV Bias Read Detect what the THV value is on the THV Roller Input Numeric 3 digits
107-070 Black THV Bias Read Detect what the THV value is on the THV Roller Input Numeric 3 digits
107-080 iTHV(+) Bias iTHV plus bias voltage on at normal drive level Output On[Off]
107-090 iTHV Bias Read Detect what the THV value is on the iTHV Roller Numeric 3 digits
4-50
Troubleshooting
Input / State
Output Displayed
107-100 iTHV(-) Bias iTHV minus bias voltage on at normal drive level Output On[Off]
107-110 Detach Bias Detack bias voltage on at normal drive level Output On[Off]
107-170 Saw Bias Saw bias voltage on at normal drive level Output On[Off]
109-000 Fuser Temperature A Detects what the temperature A is on fuser. Input Numeric 3 digits
109-010 Fuser Temperature B Detects what the temperature B is on fuser. Input Numeric 3 digits
109-030 Fuser Motor Forward Fuser Motor Forward On/Off Output On[Off]
109-110 Fuser Crum Read1 Detect if the life of fuser1 is exhausted. Input High[Low]
109-120 Fuser Crum Read2 Detect if the life of fuser2 is exhausted. Input High[Low]
109-150 Fuser Bias(+) Bias Fuser Positive bias voltage on at normal drive level Output On[Off]
109-151 Fuser Bias(-) Bias Fuser Negative bias voltage on at normal drive level Output On[Off]
110-000 LSU Motor1 Run Ready Detects if LSU motor1 runs at normal speed. Input High[Low]
110-010 LSU Motor2 Run Ready Detects if LSU motor2 runs at normal speed. Input High[Low]
110-020 LSU Fan1 Run Ready Detects if LSU Fan Motor runs at normal speed. Input High[Low]
110-040 LSU Clean Motor Detect if the LSU Clean Motor On/Off Output High[Low]
110-050 LSU Clean Sensor Detect if the LSU Clean Motor is On or Off Input High[Low]
110-060 LSU Motor1 Run LSU Motor1 On/Off Output On[Off]
110-070 LSU Motor2 Run LSU Motor2 On/Off Output On[Off]
110-080 LSU LD Power1 LSU LD1 Power On/Off (yellow) Output On[Off]
110-090 LSU LD Power2 LSU LD2 Power On/Off (magenta) Output On[Off]
110-100 LSU LD Power3 LSU LD3 Power On/Off (cyan) Output On[Off]
110-110 LSU LD Power4 LSU LD4 Power On/Off (black) Output On[Off]
110-120 LSU Fan1 Run Start/Stop LSU Fan Run Output On[Off]
111-000 Toner Dispense Motor Yellow Toner Dispense(Supply) Motor On/Off Output On[Off]
Toner Dispense Motor
111-010 Toner Dispense(Supply) Motor On/Off Output On[Off]
Magenta
111-020 Toner Dispense Motor Cyan Toner Dispense(Supply) Motor On/Off Output On[Off]
111-030 Toner Dispense Motor Black Toner Dispense(Supply) Motor On/Off Output On[Off]
111-040 Toner Sensor Yellow TC sensor in developer tank. Input Numeric 3 digits
111-050 Toner Sensor Magenta TC sensor in developer tank. Input Numeric 3 digits
111-060 Toner Sensor Cyan TC sensor in developer tank. Input Numeric 3 digits
111-070 Toner Sensor Black TC sensor in developer tank. Input Numeric 3 digits
111-100 ID Sensor(Vo1/S) Check Display ID Sensor(Vo1,S) reading value Input Numeric 4 digits
111-110 ID Sensor(Vo2/P) Check Display ID Sensor(Vo2,P) reading value Input Numeric 4 digits
113-000 Finisher Present Sensor Detect if the Finisher is in place. Input Install[Not Install]
113-010 Entrance Motor Entrance Motor run as IOT Speed <about 5 sec> Output On[Off]
113-020 Exit Motor Exit Motor run as IOT Speed <about 5 sec> Output On[Off]
113-030 Paddle Motor Paddling Output On
113-040 Front Jog Home Front Jogger move Home Output On
4-51
Troubleshooting
Input / State
Output Displayed
113-050 Front Jog Stand Front Jogger move to Stand Output On
113-060 Rear Jog Home Rear Jogger move Home Output On
113-070 Rear Jog Stand Rear Jogger move to Stand Output On
113-080 Support Finger Home Supporter move Home Output On
113-090 Support Finger Stand Supporter move to Stand Output On
113-100 Ejector Motor Ejecting Output On
113-110 Stacker Down Stacker down to bottom Output On
113-120 Stacker Up Stacker up to Stacking position Output On
113-130 Stapler Staple when no cartridge Output On
113-140 Entrance Sensor Detect paper at paper feeding area. Input High[Low]
113-150 Exit Sensor Detect paper at paper exit area. Input High[Low]
113-160 Paddle Home Sensor Detect Paddle Home position Input High[Low]
113-170 Front Jog Home Sensor Detect Front Jog Home position Input High[Low]
113-180 Rear Jog Home Sensor Detect Rear Jog Home position Input High[Low]
113-190 Support Finger Home Sensor Detect Support-Finger Home position Input High[Low]
113-200 Ejector Home Sensor Detect Ejector Home position Input High[Low]
113-210 Ejector Encoder Sensor Detect Ejector Encoder sensor Input High[Low]
113-220 Stacker Top Sensor Detect Stacker Top position Input High[Low]
113-230 Stacker Bottom Switch Detect Staple Bottom position Input High[Low]
113-240 Staple Home Sensor Detect Staple Home position Input High[Low]
113-250 Staple Ready Sensor Detect Staple Ready to clinching. Input High[Low]
113-260 Low Staple Sensor Detect Staple Low Input High[Low]
113-270 Paper Detector Sensor Detect paper in stapler area Input High[Low]
113-280 Finisher Door Switch Detect Finsher Door Open or Close Input High[Low]
113-290 IOT Set Sensor Detect Finisher is connected with IOT. Input High[Low]
113-300 Duplex Paper Sensor Deetct Duplex Paper feeding from IOT. Input High[Low]
05-100 DADF Doc. Detect Sensor Input High[Low]
05-110 DADF Paper Width Sensor Input High[Low]
05-120 DADF Paper Length Sensor Input High[Low]
05-130 DADF Registration Sensor Input High[Low]
05-140 DADF Scan Sensor DADF Scan Sensor current state Input High[Low]
05-150 DADF Gate Sensor DADF Gate Sensor current state Input High[Low]
05-160 DADF Door Open Sensor DADF Duplex Sensor current state Input High[Low]
05-170 DADF Duplex Sensor DADF Exit Open Sensor current state Input High[Low]
05-180 DADF Exit Open Sensor DADF Scan Motor Forward control Input High[Low]
05-200 DADF Scan Motor Forward DADF Duplex Motor Forward control Output On[Off]
05-210 DADF Duplex Motor Forward DADF Duplex Motor Backward control Output On[Off]
4-52
Troubleshooting
Input / State
Output Displayed
05-220 DADF Duplex Motor Backward DADF Duplex Motor Backward control Output On[Off]
05-300 DADF Pick-Up Clutch Output DADF Pick-Up Clutch control Output On[Off]
05-310 DADF Regi. Clutch Output DADF Regi. Clutch control Output On[Off]
05-400 Platen Cover Switch Platen Cover Switch Sensor current state Input High[Low]
4-53
Troubleshooting
4.3.5.4 Fax
NVM Read/Write
• Diagnostics > Test Routines > Fax > NVM Read/Write
NVM Initialization
• Diagnostics > Test Routines > Fax > NVM Initialization

• By default, none of items is selected and Initialize button shall be disabled.
There shall be Back button.
4-54
Troubleshooting
• Diagnostics > Test Routines > Fax > NVM Initialization > Initialize

Protocol Report
• Diagnostics > Test Routines > Fax > Protocol Report

• When selecting Protocol Report, the sub-item will be displayed. By pressing the print, you can print the
protocol report.
4-55
Troubleshooting
Fax Routines
• Diagnostics > Test Routines > Fax > Fax Routines

• For the behavior, refer to Engine/DADF Test Routines
4.3.5.5 Network
NVM Initialization
• Diagnostics > Test Routines > Network > NVM Initialization
4-56
Troubleshooting
• Diagnostics > Test Routines > Network > NVM Initialization>Initialize

4-57
Troubleshooting
4.3.5.6 Other
• Diagnostics > Test Routines > Other
4-58
Troubleshooting
• Diagnostics > Test Routines > Other > Print Test Pattern
You can print the test pattern by pressing the start test button.
By default, Test Pattern number shall be 1.
You can select paper source by selecting tray of the image.
You can select simplex/duplex printing option by selecting 1 sided /2 sided button.
• Diagnostics > Test Routines > Other>Shading Test
The function is used to set the optimum scan quality determined by the specific characteristics of the CCD
(Charge Coupled Device). If copy image quality is poor perform this function to check the condition of the
CCD unit.
4-59
Troubleshooting
• Diagnostics > Test Routines > Other > Scan Edge Test
• Diagnostics > Test Routines > Other > Memory Clear
The function resets the system to factory default settings.

This function is used to reset the system to the initial value when the product is functioning abnormally. All the
values are returned to the default values, and all the information which was set by the user will be erased.
When select memory clear, user can select the country.
4-60
Troubleshooting
• Diagnostics > Test Routines > Other > Print Report
- Toner Information : Toner information report

- Image Unit Information :Image unit information report
- Protocol Dump List : latest fax communication protocol report
- Auto Color Registration Result : Previous ACR history is saved (Total:10)
- Supplies Information :Toner & Image unit information report.
- Maintenance :Countable supplies resetting history & Average Coverage information .
- Job Duty : User’s printing history report (Average coverage & Job length is calculated)
- ID Control History :Previous ID sensing history is saved.
• Diagnostics > Test Routines > Other > Reset Admin. password
4-61
Troubleshooting
• Diagnostics > Test Routines > Other > Format HDD
ard Disk Drive data will be erased. When the HDD seems like has some defects this function can be
H
executed.
• Diagnostics > Test Routines > Other > Engine Memory Clear
The function resets the engine state to factory default settings.

This function is used to reset the engine to the initial value when the product is functioning abnormally.
All the values are returned to the default values. So it need to execute calibration.
(1. Admin > Setup > Color > Auto Color Tone Adjustment > Setting Color Standard,
2. Admin > Setup > Color > Auto Color Registration)
4-62
Troubleshooting
• Diagnostics > Test Routines > Other > Manual Adjust
The function adjust the printing registration.

First print the test pattern and Manual adjust ment it can be set the each colors offsetting.
• Diagnostics > Test Routines > Other > Fine Edge
This option compensate the print background registration.

Normally option value set by print driver so not necessary to set.
But not used Samsung print driver ,it can be controlled on sometimes. Default value is Normal.
4-63
Troubleshooting
• Diagnostics > Test Routines > Other > ACR Sensor Calibration
This function adjust the Auto Calibrate Registration sensor’s variation. When there is registration issue and
even though do the ACR (Admin > Setup > Color > Auto Color Registration) it is not improve, execute this
function first and repeat the ACR again.
• Diagnostics > Test Routines > Other > Report Color Print
This option controls the color report mode. Default value is Off. When it need to print all of reports with color
mode, set the option to On.
4-64
Troubleshooting
4.4 Troubleshooting
4.4.1 Procedure of Checking the Symptoms

Before attempting to repair the printer first obtain a detailed description of the problem from the customer.
Power On
- No Power
OP Panel - Power Module error
ON? - Main PBA error
- LCD Panel error
Ready or Indicate Refer to

Power save Error Massage Error Massage
< Chapter 4.x.x.x >
Test Print
printing
Quality is Refer to "Solution
Nomal? of 4.x.x.x Print Quality"
END
4-65
Troubleshooting
4.4.2 Error code and message
Messages appear on the Smart Panel program window or on the control panel display to indicate machine
status or errors. Refer to the tables below to understand the messages meaning to correct the problem, if
necessary.
TECH-MODE (Diagnostics) : Press 1/2/3 Keys in the same time & Login Password is “1934”
Troubleshooting
Error Code Error Message
Page
01-000 Door is open. Close it 4-72
Tray 2 door is open. Close it
01-001 4-73
Tray 2(HCF) door is open. Close it
01-002 Tray 3 door is open. Close it 4-74
01-004 Paper jam in MP tray 4-75
01-005 Paper jam in tray 1 4-77
Paper jam in tray 2
01-006 4-79
Paper jam in tray 2(HCF)
01-009 Paper jam inside of machine 4-83

01-010 Paper jam in exit area 4-85
Paper jam in tray 2
01-011 4-79
01-014 Paper jam at the bottom of duplex path 4-86
01-015 Paper jam at the top of duplex path 4-87
01-016 Paper jam inside of duplex path 4-86
01-017 Too much paper in output bin tray. Remove printed paper 4-88
Paper jam in tray 2
01-018 4-79
02-000 System error: #02-000. Please turn off then on 4-89
03-000 Motor does not operate: #03-000. Please turn off then on 4-92
4-66
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Page
04-000 LSU error: #04-000. Please turn off then on 4-102


06-002 Black toner cartridge is not installed. Install it 4-106
06-003 Black toner cartridge is not compatible. Check user's guide 4-106
06-004 Did not supply enough black toner. Please open/close door 4-107
06-012 Imaging unit is not installed. Install it 4-108
06-013 Imaging unit error: #06-013. Please open/close door 4-110

06-017 Black imaging unit is not compatible. Check user's guide 4-109
06-023 Black toner cartridge is not compatible. check user's guide 4-106
06-024 Black imaging unit is not compatible. Check user's guide 4-109
07-000 Paper jam in front of finisher 4-112
07-001 Paper jam inside of finisher 4-113
07-002 Paper jam at exit of finisher 4-115
07-003 Paper jam inside finisher's duplex 4-116
07-004 Too much paper in finisher stacker. Remove printed paper 4-116
07-005 Staple cartridge is not installed. Install it in finisher 4-117
07-006 Finisher door is open. Close it 4-118
07-007 Finisher error: #07-007. Please turn off then on 4-119
4-67
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Page
07-015 Staple cartridge is empty. Replace it 4-117
08-000 Original paper jam in front of scanner 4-128
08-001 Original paper does not feed in scanner 4-128
08-002 Original paper jam inside of scanner 4-129
08-003 Original paper jam while reversing paper in scanner 4-130
08-004 Original paper jam in front of scanner duplex path 4-132
08-006 Original paper jam inside of scanner 4-132
08-007 Original paper is too long for scanner. Check size 4-133
08-008 Top door of scanner is open 4-132
08-010 Original paper jam inside of scanner duplex path 4-130
10-001 Memory failure: #10-001. Please turn off then on 4-134
10-002 Fax unit error: #10-002. Please turn off then on 4-135
10-003 Hard disk drive error : #10-003. Please turn off then on 4-136
10-006 Communication problem occurred with scanner unit 4-138
10-008 Communication problem occurred with tray 2(HCF) 4-138
10-009 Communication problem occurred with tray 3 4-138
11-003 Scanner locking switch is locked or another problem occurred 4-140
12-000 Load tray 1 with [Letter], [Plain] paper 4-141
Load tray 2 with [Letter], [Plain] paper
12-001 4-141
Load HCF with [Letter], [Plain] paper
12-002 Load tray 3 with [Letter], [Plain] paper 4-142
13-000 This IP address conflicts with that of other system. Check it 4-143
13-003 BOOTP error. Switching to Auto IP 4-144
13-004 BOOTP error. Reconfigure DHCP or static IP 4-144
13-005 DHCP error. Switching to Auto IP 4-144
13-006 DHCP error. Reconfigure BOOTP or static IP 4-144
802.1x authentication failed. Please Contact the System
13-007 4-145
Administrator.
4-68
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Page
18-000 Too many faxes are received. Print or remove received fax. 4-146
18-001 Fax Memory is almost full. Print or remove received fax Job 4-146
18-002 Too many faxes are queued to be sent. Wait or remove queued job. 4-146
21-003 Tray 1 cassette is pulled out. Insert it properly 4-147
21-004 Paper is low in tray 1. Load paper 4-148
21-006 Elevating unit in tray 1 has problem. Pull tray 1 out and insert it 4-149
21-010 Paper is empty in MP tray. Load paper 4-150
21-016 Tray 2 is not installed 4-151
21-018 Paper is empty in tray 2 (or HCF). Load paper 4-152
21-019 Tray 2 (or HCF) cassette is pulled out. Insert it properly 4-153
21-020 Paper is low in tray 2 (or HCF). Load paper 4-154
Elevating unit in tray 2 (or HCF) has problem. Pull tray 2(or HCF)
21-022 4-149
out and insert it
21-024 Tray 3 is not installed 4-151
21-026 Paper is empty in tray 3. Load paper 4-152
21-027 Tray 3 cassette is pulled out. Insert it properly 4-153
21-028 Paper is low in tray 3. Load paper 4-154
21-030 Elevating unit in tray 3 has problem. Pull tray 3 out and insert it 4-149
25-002 Cyan toner cartridge is not installed. Install it. 4-106
25-003 Cyan toner cartridge is not compatible. Check user's guide 4-106
25-004 Did not supply enough cyan toner, Please open/close door 4-107
25-012 Cyan imaging unit is not installed. Install it. 4-109
25-017 Cyan imaging unit is not compatible. Check user's guide 4-109
25-023 Cyan toner cartridge is not compatible. Check user's guide 4-106
25-024 Cyan imaging unit is not compatible. Check user's guide 4-109
26-002 Magenta toner cartridge is not installed. Install it 4-106
26-003 Magenta toner cartridge is not compatible. Check user's guide 4-106
26-004 Did not supply enough magenta toner. Please open/close door 4-107
26-012 Magenta imaging unit is not installed. Install it 4-109
4-69
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Page
26-017 Magenta imaging unit is not compatible, Check user’s guide. 4-109
26-023 Magenta toner cartridge is not compatible. Check user's guide 4-106
26-024 Magenta imaging unit is not compatible. Check user's guide 4-109
27-002 Yellow toner cartridge is not installed. Install it 4-106
27-003 Yellow toner cartridge is not compatible. Check user's guide 4-106
27-004 Did not supply enough yellow toner. Please open/close door 4-107
27-012 Yellow imaging unit is not installed. Install it 4-109
27-017 Yellow imaging unit is not compatible. Check user's guide 4-109
27-023 Yellow toner cartridge is not compatible. Check user’s guide 4-106
27-024 Yellow imaging unit is not compatible. Check user's guide 4-109
28-001 Transfer belt is not installed. Install it 4-155
28-002 Transfer belt is not compatible for this machine. Check user's guide 4-155
28-003 Transfer belt is not compatible for this machine. Check user's guide 4-155
29-000 Density calibration for yellow color is failed. Check its imaging unit 4-156
Density calibration for magenta color is failed. Check its imaging
29-001 4-156
unit
29-002 Density calibration for cyan color is failed. Check its imaging unit 4-156
29-003 Density calibration for black color is failed. Check imaging unit 4-156
29-004 Sensor failure: #29-004. Call for service 4-158
29-008 Machine cannot read the resistance of yellow imaging unit 4-159
29-009 Machine cannot read the resistance of magenta imaging unit 4-159
29-010 Machine cannot read the resistance of cyan imaging unit 4-159
4-70
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Page
29-011 Machine cannot read the resistance of black imaging unit 4-159
53-000 Finisher door is open. Close it 4-160
53-001 Finisher jam door is open. Close it 4-161
53-002 Mailbox door is open. Close it 4-162
53-003 Paper jam in front of finisher 4-112
53-004 Paper jam inside finisher 4-113
53-005 Paper jam at exit of finisher 4-115
53-006 Paper jam inside finisher's duplexer 4-116
53-007 Paper jam inside mailbox 4-163
53-008 Paper jam at exit of mailbox 4-164
53-009 Too much paper in stacker(1~6). Remove printed paper 4-165
4-71
Troubleshooting
4.4.3 Troubleshooting for error code
● Code : 01-000 ● Error message : Door is open. Close it

● Symptom : Side Cover is Opened.
● Possible Cause:
1. Harness is defective, Connector is not connected properly.
2. Sensor is defective.
● Troubleshooting method :
1. Check if the Harness is defective.

Check if the connector is connected properly.
COVER OPEN
UPPPER
COVER OPEN
LOWER
2. Push the Side Cover Sensor switch from 1 to 2. Check if the UI message is changed. When pushing the
switch, you have to push both of them at once.
3. Enter the EDC mode. Follow the below sequence.

( EDC Mode Î Test Routines Î Copier Engine/DADF Test Routine Î 101-170 Î Start Î Status check
Î Stop )
4-72
Troubleshooting
● Code : 01-001 ● Error message : Tray 2(HCF) door is open. Close it

● Symptom : Tray2 or HCF door is opened.
● Possible Cause:
1. Remove the HCF or Tray2 Cover.

3. Check if the UI message on panel is changed.
4-73
Troubleshooting
● Code : 01-002 ● Error message : Tray 3 door is open. Close it

● Symptom : Tray3 door is opened.
● Possible Cause:
1. Remove the Tray3 Cover.

3. Check if the UI message on panel is changed.
4-74
Troubleshooting
● Code : 01-004 ● Error message : Paper jam in MP tray

● Symptom :
At printing, the paper from the MP tray has not reached to the feed sensor within a programmed period of
time after pick up.
● Possible Cause:
1. Pickup Clutch does not work.
2. Pickup roller rubber is worn out.
3. Feed Sensor is defective.
1. Enter the EDC mode, and execute the pick up clutch test
(EDC mode : 101-0000)
If there is any problem, check the following.
-. Check if the MP Pick-Up Clutch is assembled properly.
-. Check if the harness of the MP Pick-Up Clutch is connected
properly.

To be continued on next page…
4-75
Troubleshooting
3. Check if the MP pick up roller is worn out.
4. Check the following.

-. Check if the Feed Sensor is assembled properly.
-. Check if the harness of the Feed Sensor is
connected properly.
-. Enter the EDC mode. Execute the Feed Sensor test.
(EDC Mode Î Test Routines Î Copier Engine/DADF
Test Routine Î 102-290 Î Start Î Status check Î
Stop)

4-76
Troubleshooting
● Code : 01-005 ● Error message : Paper jam in tray 1

● Symptom :
At printing, the paper from the tray1 has not reached to a feed sensor within a programmed period of time
after pick up.
● Possible Cause:

-. Check if the Tray1 Pick-Up Clutch is assembled properly.
-. Check if the harness of the Tray1 Pick-Up Clutch is connected
properly.
-. Enter the EDC mode. Execute the Tray1 Pick-Up Clutch test.
(EDC Mode Î Test Routines Î Copier Engine/DADF Test Routine Î
101-010 Î Start Î Operation Check (from sound) Î Stop)

4-77
Troubleshooting
3. Check if the pick up roller rubber is worn out or

PICKUP FORWARD
contaminated.
ROLLER ROLLER
RETARD
ROLLER

connected properly.
Stop)

4-78
Troubleshooting
● Code : 01-006 ● Error message : Paper jam in tray 2 (or HCF)

01-011
01-018
● Symptom :
At printing, the paper from the tray2 (or HCF) has not reached to a feed sensor within a programmed
period of time after pick up.
● Possible Cause:

-. Check if the Tray2(or HCF) Motor and the Pick-Up
Clutch are assembled properly.
-. Check if the Tray2(or HCF) Motor harness and Pick-Up
Clutch harness are connected properly.
-. Enter the EDC mode. Execute the Tray2(or HCF) Pick-
Up Clutch test.
Test Routine Î 101-020 Î Start Î Operation Check Î
Stop)

4-79
Troubleshooting

PICKUP FORWARD
contaminated.
ROLLER ROLLER
RETARD
ROLLER

connected properly.
Stop)

4-80
Troubleshooting
● Code : 01-007 ● Error message : Paper jam in tray 3

01-012
01-019
● Symptom :
At printing, the paper from the tray3 has not reached to the feed sensor within a regular time after pick up.
● Possible Cause:

-. Check if the Tray3 Motor and Pick-Up Clutch are
assembled properly.
-. Check if the Tray3 Motor harness and Pick-Up Clutch
harness are connected properly.
-. Enter the EDC mode. Execute the Tray3 Pick-Up Clutch
test.
Test Routine Î 101-030 Î Start Î Operation Check Î
Stop)

4-81
Troubleshooting

PICKUP FORWARD
contaminated.
ROLLER ROLLER
RETARD
ROLLER

connected properly.
Stop)

4-82
Troubleshooting
● Code : 01-009 ● Error message : Paper jam inside of machine

● Symptom : Paper jam inside of machine
1. At Warm-up, the paper is jamming at Regi sensor or Feed sensor.
2. At printing, the paper is detecting at Regi sensor or Feed sensor continually.
3. At printing, the paper is not detected at exit sensor within a regular time.
● Possible Cause:
1. Feed sensor or Regi Sensor is defective.
2. Exit sensor is defective.
3. Feed Clutch is defective.
4. Regi Clutch is defective.

-. Check if the Feed Sensor harness is connected properly.
(EDC Mode Î Test Routines Î Copier Engine/DADF Test
Routine Î 102-290 Î Start Î Check Status Î Stop)
2. Insert the paper as shown right and check the Regi

Sensor.
Test Routine Î 102-360 Î Start Î Check Status Î
Stop)
3. Check if the Exit Sensor is working properly.

Test Routine Î 102-370 Î Start Î Check Status Î
Stop)
4-83
Troubleshooting
Exit Sensor Check if the connector is connected properly.
Regi Sensor
Feed Sensor

-. Check if the Feed/Regi Clutch are assembled properly.
-. Check if the Feed/Regi Clutch Harness are connected
properly.
Regi Clutch
-. Enter the EDC mode. Execute the Feed Clutch test.
Routine Î 101-080 Î Start Î Operation Check (from
sound) Î Stop)
-. Enter the EDC mode. Execute the Regi Clutch test.
Routine Î 101-050 Î Start Î Operation Check (from
sound) Î Stop)
Feed Clutch

4-84
Troubleshooting
● Code : 01-010 ● Error message : Paper jam in exit area
● Symptom : Paper jam in exit area
● Possible Cause:
- If there is no jammed paper but error has occurred at warm-up, exit sensor is defective.
1. Execute the Exit Sensor test.

(EDC Mode Î Test Routines Î Copier
Engine/DADF Test Routine Î 102-370 Î Start Î
Check Status Î Stop)

Exit Sensor
4-85
Troubleshooting
● Code : 01-014 ● Error message : Paper jam at the bottom of duplex path
01-016 Paper jam inside of duplex path
● Symptom :
1. At Warm-up, Duplex Ready sensor has detected the paper.
2. At Printing, Duplex sensor is not off within a programmed period of time after paper moves into duplex
path.
● Possible Cause:
1. Check the Duplex Ready Sensor Harness and Connector.
2. Check if the UI message is changed by the Duplex Ready Sensor operation.
3. Check the duplex ready sensor.

-. Check if the Duplex Ready Sensor is assembled properly.
-. Check if the Duplex Ready Sensor Harness is connected properly.
-. Enter the EDC mode. Execute the Duplex Ready Sensor test.
(EDC Mode Î Test Routines Î Copier Engine/DADF Test Routine Î 102-390 Î Start Î
Operation check Î Stop)
4-86
Troubleshooting
● Code : 01-015 ● Error message : Paper jam at the top of duplex path
● Symptom :
1. At Warm-up, Duplex sensor has detected the paper.
2. At Printing, Duplex sensor is not on within a regular time after paper moves into duplex path.
● Possible Cause:
1. Check the Duplex Sensor Harness and Connector.
2. Check if the UI message is changed by the Duplex Sensor operation.
3. Check the duplex sensor.
. 1. Check if the Harness is defective.


-. Check if the Duplex Sensor is assembled properly.
-. Check if the Duplex Sensor Harness is connected properly.
-. Enter the EDC mode. Execute the Duplex Sensor test.
(EDC Mode Î Test Routines Î Copier Engine/DADF Test Routine Î 102-380 Î Start Î Operation
Check Î Stop)
4-87
Troubleshooting
● Code : 01-017 ● Error message : Too much paper in output bin tray. Remove printed paper
● Symptom :
The out-bin full sensor is on for 600ms.
● Possible Cause:
1. Check the Out-Bin Full Sensor Harness and Connector.
2. Check if the UI message is changed by the Out-Bin Full Sensor operation.
3. Check the Out-Bin Full Sensor.


-. Check if the Out-Bin Full Sensor is assembled properly.
-. Check if the Out-Bin Full Sensor Harness is connected properly.
-. Enter the EDC Mode. Execute the Out-Bin Full Sensor test.
(EDC Mode Î Test Routines Î Copier Engine/DADF Test Routine Î 101-190 Î Start Î Operation
Check Î Stop)
4-88
Troubleshooting
● Code : 02-000 ● Error message : System Error :#02-000 Please turn off then on.
● Symptom : At Warm-up, this error has occurred. The machine does not work until power off/on.
● Possible Cause: Fuser Unit is not installed and AC is not supplied to the Heat Lamp.
1. Check that the fuser unit is installed properly. 4. Check if the thermistor connector on the
And turn the machine off then on again. Engine Board is connected properly or harness
* If the error message persists, follow the next is defective.
step.
2. Measure the Fuser Thermostat resistance value.

Check if the Thermostat is open. (Parts catalog
p.65 No.51 item)
5. Remove the Rear Lower Cover and SMPS

Shield. And check if the harness on FDB is
connected properly.
3. Measure the Heat lamp resistance value. Check

if the coil is shorted. FDB
* If the connection is OK, replace the FDB. Turn the

machine off then on again. If the problem persists,
replace the engine board.
* When you check 2,3 step above, if there is any

problem, replace the fuser unit. If the problem
persists after power off/on, follow the next step.
4-89
Troubleshooting
● Code :02-001 ● Error message : System Error :#02-001 Please turn off then on.
● Symptom : At Warm-up, this error has occurred. The machine does not work until power off/on.
● Possible Cause: The temperature does not climb to the target value within set up time. Thermistor is
defective.
1. Check if the fuser unit is installed in the machine 6. Check if the thermistor connector on the Engine
properly. Turn the machine then on. Board is connected properly or harness is defective.
* If the error persists, follow the next step.
2. Check if the fuser is overheated.

Take off the fuser. Check if the belt and roller is
defective by rotating the gear.
Belt
7. Remove the Rear Lower Cover and SMPS

Roller Shield. And check if the harness on FDB is
connected properly.
3. Check if the Thermistor is broken. (Thermistor :

Parts catalog P.65 No.53 item) FDB
* If the connection is OK, replace the FDB. Turn the

Normal Defective machine off then on again. If the problem persists,
replace the Engine board.
4. Check if the Thermistor is contaminated. Clean it

carefully.
* After following the above step 2,3,4, re-install the
fuser unit and turn the machine off then on.
If the error persists, follow the next step.
5. Update the latest FW.

* If the error persists, follow the next step.
4-90
Troubleshooting
● Code :02-002 ● Error message : System Error :#02-002 Please turn off then on.
● Symptom : The fuser unit is overheated. The machine does not work until power off/on.
● Possible Cause: The machine can not control fuser temperature.
1. Check if the fuser is overheated.
Take off the fuser. Check if the belt and roller is defective by rotating the gear.
Belt
Roller
* If there is any problem, replace the fuser unit after checking the following.
2. Check if the thermistor connector on the Engine Board is connected properly or harness is defective.
3. Remove the Rear Lower Cover and SMPS Shield. And check if the harness on FDB is connected
properly.
FDB
* If the connection is OK, replace the FDB. Turn the machine off then on again. If the problem persists,
replace the Engine board.
4-91
Troubleshooting
● Code : 03-000 ● Error message : Motor does not operate: #03-000. Please turn off then on.
● Symptom :
Motor Signal is abnormal.
● Possible Cause:
1. ITB belt is contaminated by the toner.
3. BLDC ITB Motor is defective.
4. Engine Board is defective.
1. Check if the ITB belt is contaminated by the toner.

-. Check if the Engine Board harness is defective.
-. Check if the harness is connected to the ‘T2 & BLDC ITB’ Connector on Engine Board.
'T2&BLDC ITB‘
(CN16, 15pin)
3, Check if the harness is connected to the BLDC ITB Motor properly.
4-92
Troubleshooting
4. If the harness is OK, enter the EDC mode and execute the BLDC ITB Motor test. If the BLDC motor
does not operate, replace it.
[How to replace the BLDC motor]

① Unplug the harness (10 pin) carefully.
② Remove 4 screws. Replace the BLDC Motor Ass’y.
BLDC ITB Motor
5. If the problem persists after replacing the BLDC ITB Motor, replace the Engine Board.
4-93
Troubleshooting
● Symptom : Motor Signal is abnormal.
● Possible Cause:
2. BLDC Black Motor is defective.

-. Check if the Engine Board Harness is defective.
-. Check if the harness is connected to the ‘BLDC BK’ Connector on Engine Board properly.
-. Check if the harness is connected to the BLDC BLACK Motor properly.
‘BLDC BK‘
(CN26, 13pin)
2. If the connection is no problem, enter the EDC mode and execute the BLDC BLACK Motor test.
If the BLDC motor does not operate, replace it.
[ How to replace the BLDC motor ]

① Remove the SMPS shield.
1 2
Power (SMPS,FDB)
Shield
BLDC BLACK
Motor
3. If the problem persists after replacing the BLDC Motor, replace the Engine Board.
4-94
Troubleshooting
● Possible Cause:
2. BLDC OPC Motor is defective.

-. Check if the harness is connected to the ‘BLDC OPC’ Connector on Engine Board properly.
-. Check if the harness is connected to the BLDC OPC Motor properly.
‘BLDC OPC‘
(CN24, 12pin)
2. If the connection is no problem, enter the EDC mode and execute the BLDC OPC Motor test.
If the BLDC OPC motor does not operate, replace it.

1 2
BLDC OPC
Power (SMPS,FDB) Motor
Shield
3. If the problem persists after replacing the BLDC OPC Motor, replace the Engine Board.
4-95
Troubleshooting
● Possible Cause:
2. BLDC DEVE Motor is defective.

-. Check if the harness is connected to the ‘BLDC DEVE’ Connector on Engine Board properly.
-. Check if the harness is connected to the BLDC DEVE Motor properly.
‘BLDC DEVE‘
(CN28, 14pin)
2. If the connection is no problem, enter the EDC mode and execute the BLDC DEVE Motor test.
If the BLDC DEVE motor does not operate, replace it.

1 2
Power (SMPS,FDB)
Shield
BLDC DEVE
Motor
3. If the problem persists after replacing the BLDC DEVE Motor, replace the Engine Board.
4-96
Troubleshooting
● Possible Cause:
2. BLDC FUSER Motor is defective.

-. Check if the harness is connected to the ‘BLDC Fuser’ Connector on Engine Board properly.
-. Check if the harness is connected to the BLDC Fuser Motor properly.
‘BLDC Fuser‘
(CN5, 10pin)
2. If the connection is no problem, enter the EDC mode and execute the BLDC Fuser Motor test.
If the BLDC Fuser motor does not operate, replace it.

① Remove the Engine board shield.
1 2
Engine board
shield
BLDC Fuser
Motor
3. If the problem persists after replacing the BLDC FUSER Motor, replace the Engine Board.
4-97
Troubleshooting
● Symptom : The motor to engage/ disengage the transfer belt does not operate.
● Possible Cause:
2. T1 Engage DC Motor is defective.

-. Check if the harness is connected to the ‘BLDC OPC’ Connector on Engine Board properly.
-. Check if the harness is connected to the ‘T1 Engage sensor’ connector properly.
‘BLDC OPC‘
(CN24, 12pin)
‘T1 Engage sensor‘

(CN35, 3pin)
2. If the connection is no problem, enter the EDC mode and execute the T1 Engage Motor test.
If the T1 Engage motor does not operate, replace it.
[ How to replace the DC motor ]

① Remove the SMPS board shield.
② Remove 2 screws and unplug the connector. Replace the T1 engage DC motor.
T1 Engage DC
Motor
3. If the problem persists after replacing the T1 Engage DC Motor, replace the Engine Board.
4-98
Troubleshooting
● Symptom : The motor to engage/ disengage the 2nd transfer roller does not operate.
● Possible Cause:
2. T2 DC Motor is defective.

-. Check if the harness is connected to the ‘T2&BLDC ITB’ Connector on Engine Board properly.
'T2&BLDC ITB‘
(CN16, 15pin)

-. If the connection is no problem, enter the EDC mode and execute the T2 DC Motor test.
If the Motor is not operate, remove the main drive unit.
1 2
Main Drive Unit
Main Drive unit
4-99
Troubleshooting
-. Replace the T2 DC motor from the top of the Main Drive unit.
[How to replace the DC motor ]

① Unplug the 2 pin connector.
② Remove 2 screws and replace the DC Motor Ass’y.
3 T2 DC Motor
3. If the problem persists after replacing the T2 DC Motor, replace the Engine Board.
4-100
Troubleshooting
● Symptom : Waste toner motor does not operate.
● Possible Cause:
2. Waste DC Motor is defective.

-. Check if the harness is connected to the ‘Waste Motor & LSU Clean’ Connector on Engine Board properly.
‘Waste mot & LSU Clean‘

(CN39, 10pin)

-. If the connection is no problem, enter the EDC mode and execute the Waste DC Motor test.
If the Motor is not operate, replace it.
1 2
Remove the Front OPC.
Remove the Front Cover.
Replace the Waste

DC Motor.
3. If the problem persists after replacing the Waste DC Motor, replace the Engine Board.
4-101
Troubleshooting
● Code : 04-000 ● Error message : LSU error: #04-000. Please turn off then on.
04-003 LSU error: #04-003. Please turn off then on.
● Symptom : Black LSU Polygon Motor does not operate properly. (04-000)
Yellow LSU Polygon Motor does not operate properly. (04-003)
● Possible Cause:
2. LSU is defective.

-. Check if the harness is connected to the ‘LSU P-Motor’ Connector on Engine Board properly.
-. Check if the joint ①,② harness are connected properly.
'LSU P-MOTOR‘
(CN21, 10pin)
Joint ① Joint ②
2. Enter the EDC mode. Execute the LSU Motor Run1. If there is any problem, replace the LSU.
[Refer to 3.2.2 General Disassembly / LSU ]
3. If the problem persists after replacing the LSU, replace the Engine Board.
4-102
Troubleshooting
● Symptom : After Black LD is on, Laser Beam Detect signal has not occurred or is irregular. (04-001)
After Cyan LD is on, Laser Beam Detect signal has not occurred or is irregular. (04-010)
● Possible Cause:

-. Check if the harness is connected to the ‘LSU 3&4’ Connector on Engine Board properly.
'LSU 3&4‘
(CN22, 34pin)
Joint ②
Joint ①
2. Replace the LSU.

4-103
Troubleshooting
● Symptom : After Yellow LD is on, Laser Beam Detect signal has not occurred or is irregular. (04-004)
After Magenta LD is on, Laser Beam Detect signal has not occurred or is irregular. (04-007)
● Possible Cause:

-. Check if the harness is connected to the ‘LSU 1&2’ Connector on Engine Board properly.
'LSU 1&2‘
(CN34, 32pin)
Joint ① Joint ②
2. Replace the LSU.

4-104
Troubleshooting
● Symptom : When opening or closing the LSU Shutter, it is not detected after a regular time passes.
● Possible Cause:
1. Check if the Engine Board Harness is defective. (Refer to the Troubleshooting 03-014 [step1] )
2. Replace the DC Motor.
[How to replace the DC Motor]
1 Remove the Regi Clutch. 2
4 Release the both supports of

Pusher LSU the Side door.
떼어냄
4
3 Remove the Regi Guide Remove the Regi Frame.
Replace the LSU CLN Motor Ass’y.
3. If the problem persists after replacing the LSU CLN Motor Assy, replace the Engine Board.
4-105
Troubleshooting
● Code : ● Error message :

06/25/26/27-002 06/25/26/27-002 : Toner Cartridge is Not installed, Install it
06/25/26/27-003 06/25/26/27-003 : Toner Cartridge is Not Compatible, Check User’s Guide
06/25/26/27-023 06/25/26/27-023 : Toner Cartridge is Not Compatible, Check User’s Guide
● Symptom : When installing the new toner cartridge, CRUM is not detected.
● Possible Cause:
1. CRUM ID is different from the country type of the machine.
2. CRUM is defective.
3. The circuit related to CRUM has some problem.
1. Turn the machine off then on.
2. If the problem persists, take out the toner cartridge and re-install it.
3. Check if the country type of the serial label of the toner cartridge is same with the machine country type.
< Korea Toner (Initial)> < XAA Toner >
4. If the CRUM is defective, replace the toner cartridge.
5. In case that the circuit related to CRUM is defective, check the following.
< Toner cartridge connector in SET > < CRUM Connector in Toner cartridge >
① Check if the CRUM Connector in SET and toner cartridge is contaminated or broken.
② Check the circuit related to CRUM.
4-106
Troubleshooting
● Code ● Error message

06-004 06-004 : Did not supply enough black toner, Please open/close door
25-004 25-004 : Did not supply enough cyan toner, Please open/close door
26-004 26-004 : Did not supply enough magenta toner, Please open/close door
27-004 27-004 : Did not supply enough yellow toner, Please open/close door
● Symptom : Imaging Unit could not be supplied with enough toner.
● Possible Cause:
1. The toner supply part in the imaging unit is blocked or broken.
2. The toner supply part in the toner cartridge is blocked or broken.
3. The coupling in the imaging unit does not rotate.
4. The coupling in the toner cartridge does not rotate.
5. The toner supply motor does not operate.
6. The toner supply pipe is blocked.
[case1] The toner supply part in the imaging unit is blocked or broken.
Check the toner supply shutter in the imaging unit.
① Check if the shutter is opened by pushing with hands.
② Check if the shutter spring, shutter, toner supply part in

the imaging unit are broken.
③ Replace the broken part or imaging unit.
[case2] The toner supply part in the toner cartridge is blocked or broken.
Check the toner supply shutter in the toner cartridge.
① Check if the shutter is opened by pushing with hands.
② Check if the shutter spring, shutter, toner supply part in the

toner cartridge are broken.
③ Replace the broken part or toner cartridge.
[case3] The coupling in the imaging unit does not rotate.
① Check if the Magroller driving coupling is rotated clockwise.
② If it is not rotated clockwise, replace the imaging unit.
4-107
Troubleshooting
[case4] The coupling in the toner cartridge does not rotate.
Check it the coupling of the toner

cartridge is rotated.
① Rotate the coupling clockwise.
② If the coupling is not rotated, shake

the toner cartridge 5~6 times as shown
picture.
Shake it ! ③ Print or copy about 50 pages for test.
[case5] The toner supply motor does not operate.
Toner supply
Motor
Check if the toner supply motor (Parts Catalog 12. No.35 Toner Drive) is operated properly.
① Take out the cyan toner cartridge.
② Enter the EDC mode. Execute the following test to check the motor operation.
“Toner Dispense Motor Cyan”(code 111-020)

“Toner Dispense Motor Magenta”(code 111-010)
“Toner Dispense Motor Yellow”(code 111-000)
③ If the motor is not working, replace it.
[case6] The toner supply pipe is blocked.
Check the toner supply pipe (Parts Catalog 12. No.34 Duct
Toner)
① Check if the shutter and spring is broken.

② Replace the broken part or clean the contaminated part.
4-108
Troubleshooting

06/25/26/27-012 06/25/26/27-012 : Imaging unit is not installed, Install it
06/25/26/27-017 06/25/26/27-017 : Imaging unit is not compatible, Check user's Guide
06/25/26/27-024 06/25/26/27-024 : Imaging unit is not compatible, Check user's Guide
● Symptom : When installing the new imaging unit, CRUM is not detected.
● Possible Cause:
1. CRUM is defective.
1. Turn the machine off then on.
2. If the problem persists, take out the imaging unit and re-install it.
3. If the CRUM is defective, replace the toner cartridge.
4. In case that the circuit related to CRUM is defective, check the following.
<Imaging Unit Connector in SET> < Imaging Unit CRUM Connector >
① Check if the CRUM Connector in SET and is contaminated or broken.

② Check the circuit related to CRUM.
4-109
Troubleshooting

06/25/26/27-013 06/25/26/27-013 : Imaging unit error: #06/25/26/27-013 Please open/close door
● Symptom : The toner supply into the Imaging Unit is abnormal.
(06-Black / 25-Cyan / 26-Magenta / 27-Yellow)
● Possible Cause:
1. Black/Yellow/Cyan/Magenta toner cartridge is empty or the coupling does not work properly.
2. The toner supply motor is defective or the supply shutter is defective.
3. The sensor harness of the imaging unit is defective or the connector is not connected.
[case1] If the toner cartridge is empty, replace it.

If there is toner in the toner cartridge, check that coupling is rotated clockwise properly.
<Y / M / C> <Bk>

[case2-1] The toner supply motor is defective
Toner supply
motor
Check if the toner supply motor (Parts Catalog 12. No.35 Toner Drive) is working.
① Take out the Cyan toner cartridge.

② Enter the EDC mode. Execute the following test.
“Toner Dispense Motor Black” (code 111-030)
“Toner Dispense Motor Cyan” (code 111-020)
“Toner Dispense Motor Magenta” (code 111-010)
“Toner Dispense Motor Yellow” (code 111-000)
③ If the motor is not working, replace it.
4-110
Troubleshooting
[case2-2] The supply shutter is defective.
Check the shutter in toner

supply pipe. Check the shutter in imaging unit.
[case3] The sensor harness of the imaging unit is defective or the connector is not connected.
1 2
3 -. Separate the CRUM section.

-. Check if the sensor harness is defective or not
connected.
4-111
Troubleshooting
● Code : 07-000 ● Error message : Paper jam in front of finisher

53-003
● Symptom : Feed motor has stopped for printing job.
● Possible Cause: Gate sensor defect , Feed motor defect , Finisher main board defect.
1. Check if the Finisher cable is connected to the 4. Check if the gate sensor harness is connected
machine. properly or actuator is broken.
2. Open the finisher bottom cover and check the 5. Check if the Finisher Feed motor harness is
LED on the finisher main board. connected or operated properly.
At that time, all finisher doors must be closed.

Check if the red, yellow, green LED are on. 6. If the problem persists, replace the finisher main
board.
3. If the yellow LED is not on, check the
connection of the switch in the Finisher Front
Door.
4-112
Troubleshooting
● Code : 07-001 ● Error message : Paper jam inside of finisher

53-004
● Symptom : Feed motor and exit motor have stopped for initialization or printing job.
● Possible Cause: Gate sensor defect , Feed motor defect, Finisher main board defect
1. Check if the Finisher cable is connected to the machine.
2. Open the finisher bottom cover and check the LED on the finisher main board.

Check if the red, yellow, green LED are on.
3. If the yellow LED is not on, check the connection of the switch in the Finisher Front Door.
4-113
Troubleshooting
4. Check if the gate sensor harness is connected properly or actuator is broken.

Check if the Finisher Feed motor harness is connected or operated properly.
5. Check if the finisher exit sensor harness is connected properly or actuator is broken.
Check if the finisher exit motor harness is connected or operated properly.
6. If the problem persists, replace the finisher main board.
4-114
Troubleshooting
● Code : 07-002 ● Error message : Paper jam at exit of finisher

53-005
● Symptom : Exit motor has stopped for printing job.
● Possible Cause: Exit sensor defect , Exit motor defect ,Finisher main board defect.
1. Check if the Finisher cable is connected to the 4. Check if the finisher exit sensor harness is connected
machine. properly or actuator is broken.
2. Open the finisher bottom cover and check the LED

on the finisher main board.
5. Check if the finisher exit motor harness is connected or

operated properly.

3. If the yellow LED is not on, check the connection of

the switch in the Finisher Front Door.
4-115
Troubleshooting
● Code : 07-003 ● Error message : Paper jam inside finisher's duplex

53-006
● Symptom : The paper has stopped at finisher duplex sensor for duplex job.
● Possible Cause: Duplex sensor defect, Finisher main board defect
1. Check if the Finisher Duplex harness is connected properly or actuator is broken.
● Code : 07-004 ● Error message : Too much paper in finisher stacker. Remove printed paper
● Symptom : There are too much paper in finisher tray.
● Possible Cause: Stacker height detection sensor defect, finisher main board defect.
1. Remove the paper in finisher tray.
If the paper is removed, stacker tray will lift up.
If the stacker tray does not lift up, follow the next step.
2. Check if the stacker height detection sensor is connected properly or actuator is broken.
3. Check if the stacker top detection sensor is connected and operated properly.
4-116
Troubleshooting
● Code : 07-005 ● Error message : Staple cartridge is not installed. Install it in finisher
07-015 Staple cartridge is empty. Replace it
● Symptom : Stapler does not work.
● Possible Cause: Stapler harness defect, Staple cartridge set sensor defect, Finisher Main Board defect
1. Check if the stapler harness is connected properly.
2. Check if the staple cartridge is installed properly.

3. Check if the staple cartridge set sensor is operated properly.
4-117
Troubleshooting
● Code : 07-006 ● Error message : Finisher door is open. Close it

● Symptom : Finisher could not be supplied with 24V power. So finisher has stopped.
● Possible Cause :
Some covers of the finisher and mail box are not closed.
Finisher and mail box cover S/W harness is not connected properly.
Finisher Jam door sensor is broken.
Finisher main board is broken.
1. Check if all cover of the Finisher and Mailbox is opened. Close all covers perfectly.
2. If the problem persists, check if the finisher cover S/W harness is connected and operated properly.
3. Check if the Finisher jam door sensor harness is connected properly.

Check if the Finisher jam door flag is broken.
4. Check if the Mailbox door S/W harness is connected properly.

Check if the Mailbox cover flag is broken.
4-118
Troubleshooting
● Code : 07-007 ● Error message : Finisher error: #07-007. Please turn off then on
● Symptom : Finisher does not work because of communication error between finisher and engine.
● Possible Cause: Interface Cable connection error, Interface Cable defect, Finisher Main Board defect
1. Check the Finisher I/F Cable is connected properly. Reconnect it.

2. If the problem persists, replace the Interface Cable.
4-119
Troubleshooting
● Symptom : Main Paddle does not work.
● Possible Cause: Paddle Home Sensor defect, Paddle motor defect , Main board defect
1. Check if the Finisher cable is connected to the 4. Check it the finisher paddle home sensor
machine. harness is connected properly.
2. Open the finisher bottom cover and check the 5. Check if the paddle motor harness is connected
LED on the finisher main board. properly.
At that time, all finisher doors must be closed. 6. Check if the compile separate cam is operated
Check if the red, yellow, green LED are on. properly.

connection of the switch in the Finisher Front Door.
7. If the problem persists, replace the finisher main

board.
4-120
Troubleshooting
● Code :07-009 ● Error message : Finisher error: #07-009. Please turn off then on
● Symptom : Front Jogger does not work.
● Possible Cause: Front Jogger Home Sensor defect, Front Jogger Motor defect, Finisher main board
defect.
1. Check if the Finisher cable is connected to the 4. Check if the finisher front jogger home sensor harness
machine. is connected properly.
2. Open the finisher bottom cover and check the LED 5. Check if the finisher front jogger motor harness is
on the finisher main board. connected properly.

6. Check if the front jogger shaft is contaminated.

4-121
Troubleshooting
● Symptom : Rear Jogger does not work.

● Possible Cause: Rear Jogger Home Sensor defect, Rear Jogger Motor defect, Finisher main board
defect
1. Check if the Finisher cable is connected to the 4. Check if the finisher rear jogger home sensor
2. Open the finisher bottom cover and check the 5. Check if the finisher rear jogger motor harness is
LED on the finisher main board. connected properly.

6. Check if the rear jogger shaft is contaminated.


board.
4-122
Troubleshooting
● Symptom : Extension Tray does not work.
● Possible Cause: Extension Tray Home Sensor defect, Extension Tray Motor defect, Finisher main
board defect
1. Check if the Finisher cable is connected to the 4. Check if the finisher extension tray home sensor
2. Open the finisher bottom cover and check the 5. Check if the finisher extension tray motor harness
LED on the finisher main board. is connected properly.
At that time, all finisher doors must be closed. 6. Check if the bracket of the finisher extension tray
Check if the red, yellow, green LED are on. home sensor has deformed. (Check if the bracket
meets at right angles.)

board.
4-123
Troubleshooting
● Symptom : Ejector does not work.
● Possible Cause: Ejector Home/Encoder Sensor defect, Extension Tray Motor defect , Eject Belt defect,
Finisher Main Board defect
1. Check if the Finisher cable is connected to the 4. Check if the eject home sensor harness is
machine. connected properly and the actuator is broken.
2. Open the finisher bottom cover and check the 5. Check if the ejector motor harness is connected
LED on the finisher main board. properly.
At that time, all finisher doors must be closed. 6. Check if the ejector motor encoder is idling in the
Check if the red, yellow, green LED are on. motor shaft.
7. Check if the eject belt is broken.


board.
4-124
Troubleshooting
● Symptom : Stapler does not work.
● Possible Cause: Paper detect sensor defect, Stapler defect., Stapler head defect, Finisher main board
defect.
1. Check if the Finisher cable is connected to the 4. Check if the paper detect sensor harness is connected
machine. properly and contaminated.
2. Open the finisher bottom cover and check the LED

on the finisher main board. 5. Check if the stapler harness is connected properly.
6. Check if the stapler head section is broken by the staple

chip.


4-125
Troubleshooting
● Symptom : Stack Unit does not work.
● Possible Cause: Stacker Upper Limit sensor defect, Stack Full sensor defect, Stack Lower S/W defect,
Stacker Motor defect, Finisher Main Board defect.
1. Check if the Finisher cable is connected to the machine.
2. Open the finisher bottom cover and check the LED on the finisher main board.

3. If the yellow LED is not on, check the connection of the switch in the Finisher Front Door.
4-126
Troubleshooting
4. Check if the stacker upper limit sensor harness is connected properly and the actuator is broken.
5. Check if the stacker motor harness is connected properly.
6. Check if the Stack Full sensor harness and Stacker Lower S/W harness are connected properly.
4-127
Troubleshooting
● Code : 08-000 ● Error message : Original paper jam in front of scanner

08-001 Original paper does not feed in scanner
● Symptom :
The lead edge of the document failed to actuate the scan sensor within the correct time after actuating the r
egistration sensor.
● Possible Cause:
1. Scan roller or Idle roller is defective.
2. Scan sensor or actuator is defective.
3. Document paper path is contaminated.
1.Check if the Scan roller and the Idle roller are operated properly.
Idle Roller
Scan Roller
2. Check if the scan sensor is operated. (chapter 2. : 2.3.3.7 Sensor No,50)
3. Check if the E/CLUTCH for the scan roller is operated properly.
E/Clutch for the scan roller
E/Clutch for the P/up roller
4-128
Troubleshooting
● Code :08-002 ● Error message : Original paper jam inside of scanner

● Symptom :
The lead edge of the document has not reached to scan sensor after being sensed by the regi sensor.
1. Gate sensor or actuator is defective.
2. Document paper path is contaminated.
3. WHITE BAR SHEET is not attached properly.
4. WHITE BAR is defective.
1. Check if the gate sensor is operated properly. (service Manual 2.3.3.7 Sensor 51,53)
2. Check if the WHITE BAR SHEET is attached properly.
White Bar
3. In case that the document is jammed between white bar and glass, check if the WHITE BAR get curved.
4. Check if the document paper path is contaminated.
4-129
Troubleshooting
● Code : 08-003 ● Error message : Original paper jam while reversing paper in scanner
08-010 Original paper jam inside of scanner duplex path
● Symptom : At duplex scan, the lead edge of the document has not reached to the duplex sensor after
scanning the front side.
● Possible Cause:
1. Duplex sensor or actuator is defective.
2. There is the contamination on paper path or a defective assembly.
3. Gate duplex does not work properly.
4. Duplex motor is defective.
1. Check if the gate sensor is defective. (service Manual 2.3.3.7 Sensor 51)
2. Check if the document paper path is contaminated.
3. Check if the solenoid is operated properly.
SOLENOID
Main Motor
< Top view > < Rear view >
==>Check it the Gate is rotating.
Gate
4-130
Troubleshooting
<To check the Gate rotation, disassemble the cover duplex. >
< Cover Duplex >
==>Check if the Gate position sensor is operated properly. (service Manual 2.3.3.7 Sensor 53)
4. Check if the duplex motor is operated properly. Check the connection.
DUPLEX MOTOR
4-131
Troubleshooting
● Code : 08-004 ● Error message : Original paper jam in front of scanner duplex path
● Symptom : The bottom edge of the document failed to pass the scan sensor after the lead edge of the
document has reached to the duplex sensor and scan sensor.
● Possible Cause:
1. Scan sensor or actuator is defective.
2. There is the contamination on paper path or a defective assembly.
1. Check if the scan sensor (service Manual 2.3.3.7 Sensor 50) is operated properly.
2. Check if there is the contamination on paper path or a defective assembly.
● Code : 08-006 ● Error message : Original paper jam inside of scanner
● Symptom :
The document is detected by sensors (Regi, Scan, Gate, Duplex, Reverse Stack) after initialization.
● Possible Cause:
1. Jam sensors and actuators are defective.
2. There is the jammed document in the DADF.
1. Check if Jam sensors (service Manual 2.3.3.7 Sensor 50,51,52,53,55) are operated properly.
2. Remove the jammed paper in the DADF.
● Code : 08-008 ● Error message : Top door of scanner is open
● Symptom : DADF door is opened.
● Possible Cause: : The cover open sensor is defective.
Check if the cover open sensor( service Manual 2.3.3.7 Sensor 49) is operated properly.
4-132
Troubleshooting
● Code : 08-007 ● Error message : Original paper is too long for scanner. Check size
● Symptom : The bottom edge of the document failed to pass the gate sensor after the lead edge of the
document has reached at gate sensor.
● Possible Cause: :
1. Check the document length is satisfied in specification.
2. Check if ADF roller and ADF rubber is worn out or their surface are contaminated.
1. If the ADF roller is worn out or its surface is contaminated, clean or replace it.
ADF Roller
2. If the ADF rubber is worn out or its surface is contaminated, clean or replace it.
ADF Rubber
4-133
Troubleshooting
● Code : 10-001 ● Error message : Memory failure: #10-001. Please turn off then on
● Symptom : At system booting, the memory could not be detected.
1. The memory is not installed.
2. The memory is installed but it is not inserted in the slot properly.
3. The memory is broken.
1. Turn the machine off. Remove the memory on Memory DIMM Slot and insert it again.
2. Check if the memory DIMM is supported in this machine. If or not, replace the memory DIMM.
3. If the problem persists after turning on machine, replace the memory DIMM.
< Video Board >
Memory
4-134
Troubleshooting
● Code : 10-002 ● Error message : Fax unit error: #10-002. Please turn off then on
● Symptom :Fax unit has some problem.
1. The fax card is not installed.
2. The fax card is not installed properly.
3. The fax card is broken.
4. The modem install is not done after installing the fax card
1. Replace the fax unit and check if it is working properly.

2. If the problem persists after replacing the fax unit, replace the video board.
< Engine Board & Video Board >
Fax unit case
4-135
Troubleshooting
● Code : 10-003 ● Error message : Hard disk drive error: #10-003. Please turn off then on
● Symptom : HDD has some problem.
1. Hard disk is not installed.
2. Hard disk is not installed properly.
3. Hard disk is broken.
1. Turn the machine off. If the hard disk is not installed, install it.
2. Check if the hard disk connector is connected correctly. Reconnect it and turn the machine on.
3. If the problem persists, replace the new hard disk.
4. If the problem persists after replacing the hard disk, replace the video board.
< Video Board SATA Connector >
< HDD 80G, 160G >
4-136
Troubleshooting
● Code : 10-004 ● Error message : System error: #10-004. Please turn off then on
● Symptom : Machine operation is abnormal.
● Possible Cause : GUI data communication error between video board and OPE board.
1.Check if the connector on OPE board is connected properly. Reconnect it.

If the problem persists, replace the OPE board.
< Turn up OPE > < Check the OPE connector >
2. If the problem persists after replacing the OPE board, replace the video board.
4-137
Troubleshooting
● Code : 10-006 ● Error message : Communication problem occurred with scanner unit
● Symptom : Communication error occurred with scanner board.
● Possible Cause : Communication error occurred with scanner board.
1. Check if the DADF connector is connected properly. Reconnect it.
< DADF Connector >
2. If the connection has no problem, replace the DADF board. ( Refer to 3.2.2.2 DADF in chapter 3 )
3. If the problem persists after replacing the DADF, replace the video board.
4-138
Troubleshooting
● Code : 10-008 ● Error message :

Communication problem occurred with tray 2
Communication problem occurred with tray 2(HCF)
● Symptom : Tray2 or HCF is not connected to the machine properly.
1. Option Tray Connection is defective.
1.Check if the connection between the set and the tray2 (or HCF) is correct. If the connection is correct,
replace the tray2(or HCF) board.
2. If the problem persists after replacing the tray2 (or HCF) board , replace the engine board.
● Code : 10-009 ● Error message :

Communication problem occurred with tray 3
● Symptom : Tray3 is not connected to the machine properly.

1. Option Tray Connection is defective.
1.Check if the connection between the set and the tray3 is correct. If the connection is correct, replace the
tray3 board.
2. If the problem persists after replacing the tray3 board , replace the engine board.
4-139
Troubleshooting
● Code :11-003 ● Error message : Scanner locking switch is locked or another problem occurred
● Symptom : Scanner locking switch is locked or Home checking is abnormal.
● Possible Cause:
1. Scanner locking switch is locked.
2. Scan motor is broken away.
3. Home sensor is defective.
1. Unlock the locking switch.
Locking switch
2. Check if the scan motor is assembled and the harness is connected properly.
Motor
3. Check if there is any problem between the CCDM and the shaft.
Shaft
CCDM
4. Check if the scan home sensor is operated properly. (service Manual 2.3.3.7 Sensor 48)
4-140
Troubleshooting
● Code : 12-001 ● Error message : Load tray 2 (or HCF) with [Letter], [Plain] paper
● Symptom :
The paper in tray is not proper.
● Possible Cause:
1. Check the harness and connector of the Trya2 (or HCF) Size1/2/3 Sensor.
2. Tray2 (or HCF) Size1/2/3 Sensor is defective.

2. Enter the EDC mode. Execute the tray2 (or HCF)

Size1/2/3 Sensor test.
1 Test Routine Î 102-090 (100, 110) Î Start Î
Operation Check Î Stop)
2
4-141
Troubleshooting
● Code : 12-002 ● Error message : Load tray 3 with [Letter], [Plain] paper
● Symptom :
The paper in tray is not proper.
● Possible Cause:
1. Check the harness and connector of the Tray3 Size1/2/3 Sensor.
2. Tray3 Size1/2/3 Sensor is defective.

.
2. Enter the EDC mode. Execute the tray3 Size1/2/3

Sensor test.
1 (EDC Mode Î Test Routines Î Copier Engine/DADF

Test Routine Î 102-160 (170, 040) Î Start Î
2 Operation Check Î Stop)
4-142
Troubleshooting
● Code : 13-000 ● Error message : This IP address conflicts with that of other system. Check it
● Symptom : Can not access to SWS. Can not print the page by the network.
IP address conflicts with that of other system.
1. Unplug the LAN cable.

2. To initialize the arp table, type ‘arp –d’ on MS-DOS prompt and press the enter key.
3. To check using IP, type ‘ping ip-address’ on MS-DOS prompt.
(You can check the host name by typing ‘nbtstat -a ip-address’ on MS-DOS prompt.
4. Change the machine’s IP or other device’s IP.
4-143
Troubleshooting
● Code : 13-003 ● Error message : BOOTP error. Switching to Auto IP

13-004 BOOTP error. Reconfigure DHCP or static IP
13-005 DHCP error. Switching to Auto IP
13-006 DHCP error. Reconfigure BOOTP or static IP
● Symptom : The IP of the printer is set up to Auto IP (169.254.133.x)

Can not access to SWS. Can not print the page by the network.
- IP address is set up to BOOTP but BOOTP server does not respond. So, IP address is switching to AUTO
IP.
- IP address is set up to BOOTP but BOOTP server does not respond. So, IP address is not assigned and
Auto IP is not operated.
- IP address is set up to DHCP but DHCP server does not respond. So, IP address is switching to AUTO IP.
- IP address is set up to DHCP but DHCP server does not respond. So, IP address is not assigned and
Auto IP is not operated.
1. Check if BOOTP (or DHCP) server is operated properly.( Check if both DHCP and BOOTP are
operated.)
2. Change the IP address to subnet address that is the same with PC by using LUI or SetIP.
ex) PC : 10.88.195.100
Printer: 10.88.195.101
3. Access to SWS with changed address and change the IP address assignment method.
<Static IP Address assignment in SWS>
4-144
Troubleshooting
● Code : 13-007 ● Error message : 802.1x authentication failed. Please Contact the System
Administrator.
● Symptom : Can not access to SWS. Can not print the page by the network.
Can not get the authentication from server after setting up to 802.1x on SWS. Can not access to network.
1. Check if the 802. 1x Authentication is ‘Enable’.

2. Check if the Authentication method is selected properly.
3. Check if the User Name/Password is entered properly.
4. Inquire of authentication server manager about the problem.
4-145
Troubleshooting

18-000 Too many faxes are received. Print or remove received fax.
18-001 Fax memory is full. Print or remove received fax Job
18-002 Too many faxes are queued to be sent. Wait or remove queued job.
● Symptom : Can not execute the Fax function.
There is not enough fax memory.
1. To print the received fax job, check the following.
- If there is no paper in tray, load it.
- If the toner cartridge is empty, replace it.
2. Delete the stored fax job. (Document box > System Box > Secured Received Fax )
Delete
3. Delete the stored fax job. (Document box > System Box > Send Fax )
Delete
4-146
Troubleshooting
● Code : 21-003 ● Error message : Tray 1 cassette is pulled out. Insert it properly
● Symptom :
Tray1 cassette is inserted in machine but error message is displayed.
● Possible Cause:
1. The connector of the Tray1 Home Position Sensor is not connected properly.
2. Tray1 Home Position Sensor is defective.


-. Check if the Tray1 Home Position Sensor is assembled properly.
-. Check if the Tray1 Home Position Sensor harness is connected properly.
-. Enter the EDC mode. Execute the Tray1 Home Position Sensor test.
(EDC Mode Î Test Routines Î Copier Engine/DADF Test Routine Î 102-000Î Start Î Operation
check Î Stop)
4-147
Troubleshooting
● Code : 21-004 ● Error message : Paper is low in tray 1. Load paper
● Symptom :
There are enough papers in tray1 but error message is displayed.
● Possible Cause:
1. Tray1 Paper Low Sensor harness is not connected properly.
2. Tray1 Paper Low Sensor is defective.


-. Check if the Tray1 Paper Low Sensor is assembled properly.
-. Check if the Tray1 Paper Low Sensor harness is connected properly.
-. Enter the EDC mode. Execute the Tray1 Paper Low Sensor test.
check Î Stop)
4-148
Troubleshooting

21-006 Elevating unit in tray 1 has problem. Pull tray 1 out and insert it
21-022 Elevating unit in tray2 (or HCF) has problem. Pull tray2 (or HCF) out and insert it
21-030 Elevating unit in Tray3 has problem. Pull Tray3 out and insert it
● Symptom :
Tray1 is inserted in the machine but the elevating unit does not work.
Tray2 (or HCF) is inserted in the machine but the elevating unit does not work.
Tray3 is inserted in the machine but the elevating unit does not work.
● Possible Cause:
1. Elevating Sensor is defective.
2. Elevating Motor connector is not connected properly. .
Before checking this, check ‘21-003’ or ’21-009’

error troubleshooting.
1. Push the elevating sensor actuator while the

tray1(2/ 3/ HCF) home position sensor is on.
Push it !
2. Check if the Tray1 (2 / 3/ HCF) Elevating Motor is

assembled properly.
3. Check if the Tray1 (2 / 3/ HCF) Elevating Motor
harness is connected properly.
4-149
Troubleshooting
● Code : 21-010 ● Error message : Paper is empty in MP tray. Load paper
● Symptom :
There is the paper in MP tray but error message is displayed.
● Possible Cause:
1. MP Paper Empty Sensor harness is not connected properly. .
2. MP Paper Empty Sensor is defective.


-. Check if the MP Paper Empty sensor is assembled properly.
-. Check if the MP Paper Empty sensor harness is connected properly.
-. Enter the EDC mode. Execute the MP Paper Empty sensor test.
check Î Stop)
4-150
Troubleshooting

21-016 Tray2 is not installed
21-024 Tray3 is not installed
● Symptom :
Tray2 (3 or HCF) is installed but not detected.
● Possible Cause:
IF_Under connector is defective.
1. Check if the IF_Under connector on the engine board is connected properly.
2. Check if the IF_Under connector on the tray2 (3 or HCF) board is connected properly.
3. Check if the connector between the machine and the tray2 (3 or HCF) is connected properly.
4-151
Troubleshooting

21-018 Paper is empty in tray2 (or HCF). Load paper
21-026 Paper is empty in Tray3 Load paper
● Symptom :
Paper is loaded in tray2 (or HCF) but error message is displayed. (21-018)
Paper is loaded in tray3 but error message is displayed. (21-026)
● Possible Cause:
1. Tray2 (or HCF) paper empty sensor harness is not connected properly.
2. Tray2 (or HCF) paper empty sensor is defective.


-. Check if the tray2 (3/ HCF) paper empty sensor is assembled properly.
-. Check if the tray2 (3/ HCF) paper empty sensor harness is connected properly.
-. Enter the EDC mode. Execute tray2 (3/ HCF) paper empty sensor test.
(EDC Mode Î Test Routines Î Copier Engine/DADF Test Routine Î 102-080 (102-150) Î Start Î
4-152
Troubleshooting

21-019 Tray2(or HCF) cassette is pulled out. Insert it properly
21-027 Tray3 cassette is pulled out. Insert it properly
● Symptom :
Tray2 (or HCF) cassette is inserted in machine but error message is displayed.
Tray3 cassette is inserted in machine but error message is displayed.
● Possible Cause:
1. The connector of the Tray2(3/ HCF) Home Position Sensor is not connected properly.
2. Tray2 (3/ HCF) Home Position Sensor is defective.

-. Check if the Tray2 (3/ HCF) Home Position Sensor is assembled properly.
-. Check if the Tray2 (3/ HCF) Home Position Sensor harness is connected properly.
-. Enter the EDC mode. Execute the Tray2(3/ HCF) Home Position Sensor test.
(EDC Mode Î Test Routines Î Copier Engine/DADF Test Routine Î 102-070(102-140)Î Start Î
4-153
Troubleshooting

21-020 Paper is low in Tray2(or HCF) . Load paper
21-028 Paper is low in Tray3 . Load paper
● Symptom :
There are enough papers in tray2 (or HCF) but error message is displayed.
There are enough papers in tray3 but error message is displayed.
● Possible Cause:
1. Tray2 (3/ HCF) Paper Low Sensor harness is not connected properly.
2. Tray2 (3/ HCF) Paper Low Sensor is defective.


-. Check if the Tray2 (3/ HCF) Paper Low Sensor is assembled properly.
-. Check if the Tray2 (3/ HCF) Paper Low Sensor harness is connected properly.
-. Enter the EDC mode. Execute the Tray2 (3/ HCF) Paper Low Sensor test.
(EDC Mode Î Test Routines Î Copier Engine/DADF Test Routine Î 102-130(102-200)Î Start Î
4-154
Troubleshooting

28-001 Transfer belt is not installed. Install it.
28-002 Transfer belt is not compatible for this machine. Check user’s guide.
28-003
● Symptom : The red LED is turning on and the machine does not operate.
● Possible Cause: :
The transfer belt unit is installed in the machine but the machine could not read information from CRUM.
CRUM information is different from machine.
1. Check if the CRUM terminal of the transfer belt unit is contaminated. Clean the contact point.
Transfer Belt Unit CRUM

CRUM terminal
2. Check if the Transfer Belt Unit CRUM Harness is defective and connected on engine board properly.
Transfer Belt Unit CRUM Harness
3. Replace the CRUM to the normal thing and test it. If the CRUM is defective, replace the transfer belt
unit.
4-155
Troubleshooting
● Code : ● Error message

29-000 29-000 : Density calibration for yellow color is failed. Check its imaging unit
29-001 29-001 : Density calibration for magenta color is failed. Check its imaging unit
29-002 29-002 : Density calibration for cyan color is failed. Check its imaging unit
29-003 29-003 : Density calibration for black color is failed. Check its imaging unit
● Symptom : The toner calibration value of the Imaging Unit is abnormal.
● Possible Cause:
1. The sensitivity value of the toner density sensor is not in normal area.
First, turn the machine off then re-install the imaging unit.
Turn the machine on. If the problem persists, check the following.
[case1] The sensitivity value of the toner density sensor is not in normal area.
① Open and close the side cover (1~2 times)

② If the problem persists, replace the imaging unit.
③ If the problem persists after replacing the imaging unit, check the relative harness and hardware part.
[case2] The circuit related to CRUM has some problem.
① Check the circuit related to CRUM in the imaging unit.
1 2
- Disassemble the CRUM part.

3
- Check if the sensor harness is defective or
connector is connected properly.
- Replace the imaging unit.
4-156
Troubleshooting
② CRUM Connector in SET/Imaging unit is contaminated or connector pin is broken.
< CRUM Connector in SET > < Imaging Unit CRUM Connector >
4-157
Troubleshooting
● Code : ● Error message

29-004 29-004 : Sensor failure: #29-004. Call for service
● Symptom : T/C value keeps constant. (In case of normal status, it is a periodic waveform. )
● Possible Cause:
1. Sensor defect / Sensor assembly defect / Sensor harness defect
2. ADC on the engine board is defective.
[case1] Sensor defect / Sensor assembly defect / Sensor harness defect
① Check the circuit related to CRUM in the imaging unit.
1 2
3 - Disassemble the CRUM part.

- Check if the sensor harness is defective or connector is
connected properly.
- Replace the imaging unit.
② CRUM Connector in SET/Imaging unit is contaminated or connector pin is broken.
< CRUM Connector in SET > < Imaging Unit CRUM Connector >
[case2] ADC on the engine board is defective. Æ Replace the engine board.
4-158
Troubleshooting
● Code ● Error message

29-008 29-008 : Machine cannot read the resistance of yellow imaging unit
29-009 29-009 : Machine cannot read the resistance of magenta imaging unit
29-010 29-010 : Machine cannot read the resistance of cyan imaging unit
29-011 29-011 : Machine cannot read the resistance of black imaging unit
● Symptom :
Contact of the OPC unit is abnormal or high voltage part has some problem. So, the resistance of the
charge roller can not be read in a normal area.
● Possible Cause:
1. The proper current value is not sensed by a wrong installation of the imaging unit.
2. High voltage has not occurred.
3. The current value is not sensed by a HVPS defect.
[case1] The proper current value is not sensed by a wrong installation of the imaging unit.
Check the high voltage contact between SET and imaging unit.
① Take out the imaging unit and check the HV contact in SET.
② Check if the HV contact of the Imaging Unit is contaminated.
[case2] High voltage has not occurred.

Check if the HVPS connector is connected properly.
MHV_C/K
MHV_Y/M
[case3] The current value is not sensed by a HVPS defect. Æ Replace the HVPS board.
4-159
Troubleshooting
● Code : 53-000 ● Error message : Finisher door is open. Close it
● Symptom : Although the finisher door is closed, the error message will be displayed.
● Possible Cause: Finisher door switch defect , Finisher Cover flag defect
1. Check if the finisher door switch is operated properly.
2. Check if the finisher cover flag is broken.
4-160
Troubleshooting
● Code : 53-001 ● Error message : Finisher jam door is open. Close it

● Symptom : Although the finisher door is closed, the error message will be displayed.
● Possible Cause: Finisher jam door sensor defect, Finisher jam door flag defect.
1. Check if the Finisher jam door sensor is operated properly.
2. Check if the Finisher Jam door flag is broken.
4-161
Troubleshooting
● Code :53-002 ● Error message : Mailbox door is open. Close it
● Symptom : Although the mail box door is closed, the error message will be displayed.
● Possible Cause: Mailbox door switch defect, door flag defect.

1. Check if the Mailbox door S/W harness is connected properly.
2. Check if the Mailbox cover flag is broken.
4-162
Troubleshooting
● Code :53-007 ● Error message : Paper jam inside mailbox

● Symptom : Paper is jamming inside mailbox.
● Possible Cause:
Connection error between Finisher and Mailbox, Mailbox Feed motor defect, Gate Motor defect,
Finisher Main Board defect
1. If the connection between Finisher and machine 4. Check if the Gate motor of the Mailbox Bin is
is correct and finisher works properly, follow the connected and operated properly.
next step. Check if the Gate home sensor is connected and
operated properly.
2. Check the connection between finisher and
mailbox.
3. Check if the Mailbox Feed Motor is connected

and operated properly.
5. Check if the Mailbox Gate is operated properly.
6. If the problem persists, replace the mailbox main

board.
4-163
Troubleshooting
● Code :53-008 ● Error message : Paper jam at exit of mailbox
● Symptom : Paper is jamming inside mailbox.
● Possible Cause: Connection error between Finisher and Mailbox, Mailbox Feed motor defect, Gate
Motor defect, Finisher Main Board defect
1. If the connection between Finisher and machine 4. Check if the Gate motor of the Mailbox Bin is
is correct and finisher works properly, follow the connected and operated properly.
next step. Check if the Gate home sensor is connected and
operated properly.
2. Check the connection between finisher and
mailbox.
3. Check if the Mailbox Feed Motor is connected

and operated properly.
6. Check if the exit sensor in the Gate is operated

properly.
7. If the problem persists, replace the mailbox main

board.
4-164
Troubleshooting
● Code : 53-009 ● Error message : Too much paper in stacker(1~6). Remove printed paper
● Symptom : There is no paper on Mailbox stacker but the error message is displayed by the full detection
sensor defect.
● Possible Cause: Mailbox empty detection sensor defect, Full detection sensor defect, Finisher Main
Board defect.
1. If the connection between Finisher and machine is correct and finisher works properly, follow the next
step.
2. Check the connection between finisher and mailbox.
3.Check if the empty detection sensor is connected properly and the actuator is broken.
4. Check if the full detection sensor is connected properly and the actuator is broken.
5. If the problem persists, replace the mailbox main board.
4-165
Troubleshooting
53-011 Finisher error: #53-011. Please turn off then on
● Symptom :
It is abnormal that paper comes out on Bin 4,5,6. (53-010)
It is abnormal that paper comes out on Bin 2,3. (53-011)
● Possible Cause: Connection error between Finisher and Mailbox, Gate Motor defect, Home sensor
defect, Finisher Main Board defect
1. If the connection between Finisher and machine is correct and finisher works properly, follow the next
step.
2. Check the connection between finisher and mailbox.
3. Check if the Upper Gate Motor (53-010) and Lower Gate Motor (53-011) are connected properly and
broken.
< Upper Gate Motor > < Lower Gate Motor >
4. Check if the Upper Gate Home sensor (53-010) and Lower Gate Home sensor (53-011) are connected
properly.
6. If the problem persists, replace the mailbox main board.
4-166
Troubleshooting
4.4.4 Image quality problems and solutions
Troubleshooting
Section Code Defect
Page
B-1 Horizontal Thick/Dark Band(s) 4-168~169
B-2 Vertical White Band 4-170~172
Band B-3 Vertical Moving White Band 4-173~174
B-4 Vertical White Band for Copy Job 4-175
B-5 Vertical Thick/Dark Band 4-176~177
D-1 Low Image Density 4-178~179
Density D-2 Vertical Irregular Image Density 4-180~182
D-3 Horizontal Image Density Difference 4-183
I-1 Full Solid Image 4-184
I-2 Foggy Backgrounds 4-185
I-3 Auger Marks 4-186
Image I-4 Carriers on Image 4-187
I-5 No Image Output 4-188
I-6 Dragged Image 4-189~191
I-7 Inaccurate Color Registration 4-192~193
J-1 Micro Jitter 4-194
Jitter
J-2 Periodic Jitter 4-195
L-1 Horizontal Line(s) 4-196~198
Line
L-2 Vertical Random Streak 4-199~201
Spot S-1 Spots 4-202~203
T-1 Toner Contamination 4-204~205
Toner T-2 Offset Image 4-206~207
T-3 Insufficient Toner Fixing 4-208
4-167
Troubleshooting
● Code : B-1 ● Horizontal Thick/Dark Band
● Sample Image :
4-168
Troubleshooting
● Code : B-1 ● Horizontal Thick/Dark Band
● Symptom :
-. Horizontal Thick Band(s) for a Particular Color
-. Horizontal Dark Band
● Possible Cause:
1. Gear or Roller is defective.
2. The OPC defect in imaging unit has occurred because of environment change.
[Case 1] Gear or Roller is defective.
If the horizontal line defect occurs at regular intervals, refer to ‘4.4.5 Abnormal Image Printing and
defective Roller’ on page 4-209.
Refer to the defect period table and replace the defective part.
[Case 2] The OPC defect in imaging unit has occurred because of environment change.
1) In case of this, print out 100 pages at 2~3 pages intervals.
2) If the problem is improved, use the machine as things stand.
3) If the problem persists, replace the imaging unit.
4-169
Troubleshooting
● Code : B-2 ● Vertical White Band
● Sample Image :
4-170
Troubleshooting
● Code : B-2 ● Vertical White Band
● Symptom :
-. Vertical White Band
● Possible Cause:
1. Exposure defect by LSU contamination
2. A contaminant sticks to Dr.Gap.
3. OPC, ITB scratch
[Case 1] Exposure defect by LSU contamination
If the sharp vertical white band has occurred, it is likely due to LSU optical path contamination.
(1) Check if there is any contaminant on exposure window of the imaging unit.
(2) Check if there is any contaminant on exposure path in set.
Y M C K
(3) Check if the LSU window is contaminated.

- Clean the LSU window or replace the LSU.
(4) If the problem persists, replace the imaging unit.
4-171
Troubleshooting
[Case 2] A contaminant sticks to Dr.Gap.

(1) Check if there is a contaminant between Mag. Roller and Doctor Blade. Remove it with OHP film.
[Case 3] OPC, ITB scratch
(1) If the white band has occurred for specific color, check if the OPC surface or ITB surface is scratched.
① Check it there is a contaminant ② Check it there is a contaminant between IT

between Scattering pole and OPC. surface and OPC top cover.
Scattering pole
OPC
4-172
Troubleshooting
● Code : B-3 ● Vertical Moving White Band
● Sample Image :
4-173
Troubleshooting
● Code : B-3 ● Vertical Moving White Band
● Symptom :
-. Vertical Moving White Band
● Possible Cause:
There is a contaminant between Mag. Roller and Doctor Blade.
4-174
Troubleshooting
● Code : B-4 ● Vertical White Band for copy job
● Symptom :
-. Vertical White Band for Copy Job
● Possible Cause:
1. There is a contaminant on Scanner optical path.
2. Scanner is defective.
(1) If there is a contaminant on scan glass. Clean it.
(2) If the problem persists, replace the sensor or scanner unit.
4-175
Troubleshooting
● Code : B-5 ● Vertical Thick/Dark Band 1/2
● Symptom :
-. Vertical Band for a Particular Color
-, Vertical Dark Band
● Possible Cause:
1. Dr.Gap defect
2. LSU window contamination
3. Charging defect by the charging roller contamination.
4. OPC, ITB Cleaning Blade defect.
[step1] Dr.Gap defect

(1) If it is possible to disassemble the imaging unit, check if the DMA on Mag. Roller is distributed equally.
If or not, replace the imaging unit.
[step2] LSU window contamination
4-176
Troubleshooting
● Code : B-5 ● Vertical Thick/Dark Band 2/2
Y M C K

[Step 3] Charging defect by the charging roller contamination.
Check if the charging roller and cleaning roller are contaminated. If it is contaminated, replace the imaging
unit.
OPC
Charging Roller
Cleaning Roller
[step4] OPC, ITB Cleaning Blade defect.
Check if there is a contaminant on OPC surface or ITB surface. Replace the imaging unit or ITB.
4-177
Troubleshooting
● Code : D-1 ● Low Image Density 1/2
● Symptom :
-. Low Image Density for a Particular Color
-. Low Image Density for All Colors.
● Possible Cause:
1. ID Calibration Setting is wrong.
2. Imaging unit is defective.
3. ID Sensor is defective.
4. HVPS is defective.
[case1] ID Calibration Setting is wrong

(1) Set up ‘Color Toner Adjustment’ (Admin Setting -> SetUp -> Color -> Color Tone Adjustment)
① Check if ‘Color Tone Adjustment Activation’ is on.

② If it is ‘On’, execute ‘Setting Color Standard’.
③ Follow the UI message.
(2) In case that the density for specific color is defective.

Set up ‘Manual Adjust’ (Admin Setting -> SetpUp -> Color -> Custom Color -> Manual Adjust)
① Adjust the color density.
② There is the 11 step (-05 ~ +05)

When you select ‘+ step’, the density is higher.
4-178
Troubleshooting
● Code : D-1 ● Low Image Density 2/2
[case2] Imaging unit is defective.
Replace the imaging unit
[case3] ID Sensor is defective.
Replace the ID sensor.
[case4] HVPS is defective.
If the problem persists after replacing the imaging unit, replace the HVPS-L and HVPS-S.
4-179
Troubleshooting
● Code : D-2 ● Vertical Irregular Image Density 1/3
● Symptom :
-. Vertical Irregular Image Density for a Particular Color
-. Vertical Irregular Image Density for All Colors
● Possible Cause:
1. LSU window is contaminated.
2. There is a contaminant in the Dr. Gap.
3. T1 Roller is not installed properly.
4. T2 transfer is defective.
[step1] LSU window is contaminated
If the sharp vertical white band has occurred, it is likely due to LSU optical path contamination.
Y M C K

4-180
Troubleshooting
[step2] There is a contaminant in the Dr. Gap.

[step3] T1 Roller is not installed properly.

(1) Take out the ITB and check if the left/right springs of the T1 roller is installed properly. If it is defective,
reassemble it.
(2) If the problem persists, replace the ITB.

(4) Check if there is the contaminant on contact surface between imaging unit and ITB.
[step4] T2 transfer is defective.
(1) Check if the side cover is closed correctly.
4-181
Troubleshooting
(2) Check if the T2 roller is installed properly. Re-install or replace the T2 roller.
① Open the SIDE COVER. ② Remove the Guide.
③ Remove the T2 roller. ④ Check the T2 Roller contact point.
(3) Enter the EDC mode. Execute ‘T2 Engage/Disengage’ test to check if T2 Cam is operated properly.
(4) If the problem persists, replace the fuser unit.
4-182
Troubleshooting
● Code : D-3 ● Horizontal Image Density Difference
● Symptom :
-. Image Density Difference Between Right and Left Sides for a Particular Color
-. Image Density Difference Between Right and Left Sides for all colors
● Possible Cause:
1. T1 roller in ITB is not installed properly.
2. Imaging unit is defective.
3. T2 Engage defect.
[step1] T1 roller in ITB is not installed properly.
(1) Take out the ITB and check if the left/right springs of the T1 roller is installed properly. If it is defective,
reassemble it.
(2) If the problem persists, replace the ITB.

[step2] Imaging unit is defective.
If the problem persists after replacing the ITB, replace the imaging unit.
[step3] T2 Engage defect
Check if the side cover is closed correctly.
4-183
Troubleshooting
● Code : I-1 ● Full Solid Image
● Symptom :
-. Full Solid Black / Color Image
● Possible Cause:
1. Imaging unit charging defect
2. LSU defect, Engine board defect, Video board defect
[case1] Imaging unit charging defect

(1) Remove the imaging unit and re-install it.
(2) If the problem persists, check if the connector on HVPS-L is connected properly. Reconnect it.
T2 HV
HVPS2
(Engine board)
HVPS1
(Engine board)
T1_Y/M/C/K
Not used
WASTE_FULL MHV_C/K
MHV_Y/M FAN_LSU
_SENSOR
<HVPS-L PBA>

(4) If the problem persists, replace the HVPS-L.
[case2] LSU defect, Engine board defect, Video board defect
(1) Replace the engine board.

(2) If the problem persists, replace the video board.
(3) If the problem persists, replace the LSU.
4-184
Troubleshooting
● Code : I-2 ● Foggy Background
● Symptom :
-. Foggy Backgrounds for a Particular Color
● Possible Cause:
1. Imaging unit charging defect / HVPS charging, HV output defect.
2. Environment recognition sensor defect.
[case1] Imaging unit charging defect / HVPS charging, HV output defect.

(1) Replace the imaging unit.
(2) If the problem persists, replace the HVPS-L.
(3) If the problem persists, replace the HVPS-S.
[case2] Environment recognition sensor defect.
(1) Check if there are heat, cold wind by heater or air-conditioner. These things make the
environment recognition sensor get wrong information. In this case, move the machine in
proper place.
(2) Replace the environment recognition sensor.
<Environment recognition sensor >
4-185
Troubleshooting
● Code : I-3 ● Auger Marks
● Sample Image :
Replace the imaging unit
4-186
Troubleshooting
● Code : I-4 ● Carriers on Image
● Symptom :
Carriers On Printed Image
● Possible Cause:
High voltage of the imaging unit is abnormal.
1. Check if the HVSPS high voltage output and contact point is normal.
2. If it is defective, replace the imaging unit.
T2 High voltage
HVPS2
(to engine board)
HVPS1
(to engine board)
T1_Y/M/C/K
Not used
WASTE_FUL MHV_C/K
MHV_Y/M FAN_LSU
L_SENSOR
<HVPS-L PBA>
SAW_PLATE DEVE_Y/M/C/K
FUSER_BIAS SIGNAL_HVPS_S
(to engine board)
<HVPS-S PBA>
4-187
Troubleshooting
● Code : I-5 ● No Image Output
● Symptom :
No Image Output at Printing
● Possible Cause:
Developing High voltage is abnormal.
LSU defect
Engine board, Video board
1. Check if the HVSPS high voltage output and contact point is normal.
2. If it is defective, replace the HVPS. If or not, replace the imaging unit.
* If there is no problem on developing section.
3. Replace the engine board.

4. If the problem persists, replace the video board.
5. If the problem persists, replace the LSU.
4-188
Troubleshooting
● Code : I-6 ● Dragged Image 1/3
● Sample Image :
4-189
Troubleshooting
● Symptom :
-. Dragged Image
● Possible Cause:
1. OPC driving defect
2. ITB contamination.
(1) Check if the OPC coupling is OK. Rotate it 2~3 times.
Counterclockwise
(2) Check if the coupling in set is OK.
OPC Coupling
Mag.Roller Coupling
(3) Check if the Color OPC Motor, Black motor is operated properly.
Color OPC Motor
Bk OPC & Bk Deve Motor
Color Deve Motor
4-190
Troubleshooting
(4) If the white band has occurred for specific color, check if the OPC surface or ITB surface is scratched.
① Check it there is a contaminant ② Check it there is a contaminant between IT

between Scattering pole and OPC. surface and OPC top cover.
Scattering pole
OPC
4-191
Troubleshooting
● Code : I-7 ● Inaccurate Color Registration 1/2
● Sample Image :
< Good Image > < Bad Image >
4-192
Troubleshooting
● Code : I-7 ● Inaccurate Color Registration 2/2
● Symptom :
There is a white gap between the background and text on printed page.
The printed text or picture is not aligned.
● Possible Cause:
1. ACR (Auto Color Registration) function Off or Fail
- ACR (Auto Color Registration) function Off : ACR function is ‘off’ status. Æ (1)
- ACR fail : ACR function is executed automatically but failed.
Execute the ACR function manually. Æ (2)
- ACR Sensor Calibration defect
ACR Sensor Calibration was not executed. Æ (3)
ACR Sensor Calibration fails continually. Æ (4)
(1) Enter the admin mode and enable the ACR function.
( Machine Setup > Setup > Color > Auto Color Registration > ON )
You can change the ACR execution condition.
- Page Condition
- Inner Temperature Condition
- LSU Temperature Condition
(2) Execute the ACR function manually.

( Machine Setup > Setup > Color > Auto Color Registration > Execute Now )
(3) Execute the ACR Sensor Calibration.

( Tech Mode > Test Routines > Other > ACR Sensor Calibration > Yes )
(4) If the ACR Sensor Calibration fails continually, check the following.
A. Check the ACR Harness is defective. Replace it.
B. If the problem persists, replace the ACR Sensor
C. If the problem persists, replace the Engine Control Board.
4-193
Troubleshooting
● Code : J-1 ● Micro Jitter
● Sample Image :
● Symptom :
-. Horizontal Micro Jitter (sub-1mm Pitch) for a Particular Color
(1) Check if there are heat, cold wind by heater or air-conditioner. These things make the
proper place.
(2) Replace the environment recognition sensor.
(3) If the problem persists, replace the imaging

unit.
Environment recognition
sensor.
4-194
Troubleshooting
● Code : J-2 ● Periodic Jitter
● Symptom :
-. Horizontal Periodic Jitter (2~4mm pitch) for YMC Color
● Possible Cause:
1. MagRoll Auger Gear Jitter (2mm)
2. Waste toner Auger Jitter (4mm)
3. Drive unit in set is defective.
[case1] MagRoll Auger Gear Jitter (2mm)

Check the Mag roller auger gear is defective. If it is defective, replace the imaging unit.
Mag.Roller Auger Gear
[case2] Waste toner Auger Jitter (4mm)
Check the waste toner auger gear is defective. If it is defective, replace the imaging unit.
Waste toner Auger Gear
[case3] Set driving unit defect
If the auger is OK, check the driving unit in set.

If necessary, replace the drive unit.
4-195
Troubleshooting
● Code : L-1 ● Horizontal Line 1/3
● Sample Image :
4-196
Troubleshooting
● Sample Image :
4-197
Troubleshooting
● Symptom :
-. Horizontal White Line(s)
-. Horizontal Sharp Line(s) for a Particular Color
-. Horizontal Sharp Line(s) for Multiple Colors of 78mm Gap
● Possible Cause:
1. Gear defect , OPC defect
2. High voltage section defect
[step1] Gear defect , OPC defect
If the horizontal line defect occurs at regular intervals, refer to ‘4.4.5 Abnormal Image Printing and
[step2] High voltage section defect
1) If the horizontal line occurs randomly, take out the imaging unit and re-install it again.
2) If the problem persists, check the high voltage contact point.
4-198
Troubleshooting
● Code : L-2 ● Vertical Random Streak 1/3
● Symptom :
-. Vertical Random Streak
● Possible Cause:
1. OPC surface scratch.
2. ITB scratch.
1. Check if the OPC surface is scratched or has a contaminant.
If the OPC surface is defective, replace the imaging unit.
2. Check if the ITB surface is scratched or has a contaminant. If it is defective, replace the ITB.
4-199
Troubleshooting
3. Check if the T2 roller is installed properly. Re-install or replace the T2 roller.
① Open the SIDE COVER. ② Remove the Guide.
③ Remove the T2 roller. ④ Check the T2 Roller contact point.
4. Enter the EDC mode. Execute ‘T2 Engage/Disengage’ test to check if T2 Cam is operated properly.
5. If the problem persists, replace the fuser unit.
4-200
Troubleshooting
6. Check if the HV contact point on imaging unit is contaminated.
7. If the problem persists, replace the HVPS-L, HVPS-S
< HVPS-L PBA> < HVPS-S PBA >
8. If the problem persists, replace the harness between HVPS and imaging unit.
And measure the resistance between ground shield and High voltage output connector.
9. If the problem persists, replace the engine board Æ video board Æ LSU in order.
4-201
Troubleshooting
● Code : S-1 ● Spots 1/2
● Sample Image :
4-202
Troubleshooting
● Code : S-1 ● Spots 2/2
● Symptom :
-. Periodic White/Black/Color Spots
-, White Spot on Solid Image
-. Dot Size Blac/Color Spots
● Possible Cause:
1. OPC, charging roller, transfer roller defect.
2. Resistance change of the roller, Paper change by environment.
1. If the horizontal line defect occurs at regular intervals, refer to ‘4.4.5 Abnormal Image Printing and
2. Check if the paper in tray is changed. Load new papers in tray.
3. If the problem persists, replace the transfer roller.
4. Check if there are heat, cold wind by heater or air-conditioner. These things make the
proper place.
5. Replace the environment recognition sensor.
Environment recognition
sensor.
4-203
Troubleshooting
● Code : T-1 ● Toner Contamination 1/2
● Sample Image :
4-204
Troubleshooting
● Code : T-1 ● Toner Contamination 2/2
● Symptom :
-. Toner Contamination on Printed Image
-. Toner Contamination on the Lead Edge of the paper
-, Toner Contamination on the back of the paper
● Possible Cause:
1. Background by charging defect.
2. Paper Path contamination.
3. Imaging unit contamination.
1. If the printed page is contaminated as a whole, replace the imaging unit.

If the problem persists after replacing the imaging unit, replace the HVPS-L, HVPS-S in order.
2. If the printed page is contaminated partially, remove the waste toner scatter in the imaging unit.
① Remove 2 screws. ② Remove the cover and remove the toner contamination.
If the contamination is excessive, replace the imaging unit.
3. If the lead edge of the printed page is contaminated, clean the paper path guide or replace the T2 unit.
4. If the problem persists, replace the HVPS-L.
4-205
Troubleshooting
● Code : T-2 ● Offset Image 1/2
● Sample Image :
4-206
Troubleshooting
● Code : T-2 ● Offset Image 2/2
● Symptom :
-. Offset Image (After-image on OPC)
● Possible Cause:
1. Environment recognition sensor defect.
2. High voltage output error by HVPS defect.
1) Check if there are heat, cold wind by heater or air-conditioner. These things make the
proper place.
2) Replace the environment recognition sensor.
3) If the problem persists, replace the HVPS-L.

4) If the problem persists, replace the HVPS-S.
4-207
Troubleshooting
● Code : T-3 ● Insufficient Toner Fixing
● Symptom :
-. Insufficient Toner Fixing on Printed Image
● Possible Cause:
1. Fuser unit defect
2. Fuser temperature detection error.
1. Replace the fuser unit.
2. If the problem persists, replace the engine board.
4-208
Troubleshooting
4.4.5 Abnormal Image Printing and Defective Roller

If a mark or other printing defect occurs at regular intervals down the page, it may be caused by a damaged
or contaminated roller. Make sure the repetition interval by consulting the table below.
If the roller is dirty, try to clean it. If the problem is still occurred after cleaning the roller, replace the part
including the defective roller.
Period
NO Roller Phenomenon Replace part
(mm)
1 Pressure Roller 94.2 Offset, Spot, Line Burst Fuser Unit
White and Black Spot, Periodic Banding,
2 T2 Roller 88.0 Transfer Roller
Rear Side Paper Dirty
3 Registration Roller 59.7 Roll Mark -
4 Pick-up Roller 72.3 Roll Mark -
Cartridge
5 Drive Roller 77.8 Periodic Banding, Color Registration
Transfer Unit
Cartridge
6 T1 Roller 44.0 White and Black Spot, Periodic Banding
Transfer Unit
7 Exit Roller 47.1 Roll Mark, Vertical Scratch -
White and Black Spot, Periodic Banding,
8 OPC Drum 94.3 Imaging Unit
Ghost, Color Registration
9 Charger Roller 44.0 White and Black Spot, Periodic Banding Imaging Unit
10 Magnetic Roller (YMC) 35.3 Periodic Banding Imaging Unit
11 Fuser Belt 127.04 Waving, Offset, Spot, Line Burst Fuser Unit
Cartridge
12 Cartridge Transfer Unit 785.4 White and Black Spot, Periodic Banding
Transfer Unit
13 Magnetic Roller(BK) 28.27 Banding Imaging Unit
14 Charger cleaning roll 50.05 Banding Imaging Unit
4-209
Troubleshooting
■ Repetitive defect Image check page
Print this page. Align the this page and the printed defect image and find the defective roller.
Start line
13 Magnetic Roller(BK)
10. Magnetic roller
(CMYK)
9. Charge roller
6. T1 roller
7. Exit roller
14 Charger cleaning roll
3. Registration Roller
4. Pick up roller
5. Drive roller
2. T2 roller
1. Pressure roller
8. OPC Drum
11. Fuser belt
12. Cartridge
Transfer Unit
4-210
Troubleshooting
11
12 5
6 2
8 14
10 13
9 3
No Description No Description
1 Pressure Roller 8 OPC Drum
2 T2 Roller 9 Charger Roller
3 Registration Roller 10 Magnetic Roller (YMC)
4 Pick up Roller 11 Fuser Belt
5 Drive Roller 12 Cartridge Transfer Unit
6 T1 Roller 13 Magnetic Roller (K)
7 Exit Roller 14 Charger Cleaning Roller
4-211
Troubleshooting
4.4.6 Other errors
● Symptom : No booting / No power

Engine is not warming up and LCD does not display anything on.
1. Power Out
2. Fail to Initialize Video PBA
[1. Power Out]

1.1) Check the power cord and power inlet.
1.2) Check whether the LED on video PBA is flickered on.
If the LED is off, go to next step.
1.3) Check and confirm 5V/ 24V output from SMPS.
5V : 1,3,5 Pin
24V : 1,3,5,7 Pin
If there is a defect, replace the SMPS board.
5V
24V
1.4) Check power wire connections from SMPS to Engine PBA.

1.5) Check core voltages in Video/Engine PBA. Replace the Engine PBA.
[2. Fail to Initialize Video PBA]

2.1) Check the connections of DIMM Memory, HDD, and GUI interface harness.
2.2) Reboot the set.
2.3) If the set is not initialized, replace the Video PBA.
4-212
Troubleshooting
● Symptom : 1. Continuous Logo Display at Initial State

2. No display on LCD
Fail to Initialize Communication Port between Video PBA & OPE PBA
1) Check +5V on OPE PBA. ( 7,8,9 Pin of Main IF (power) / Refer to Page 2-29)
Check the flexible pcb harness connecting between OPE PBA and LCD panel.
If there is a defect, replace the OPE PBA or LCD panel.
2) Check the connection between Video PBA (UI_IF on Page 2-23) and OPE PBA.
3) Reboot the set.
4) Send any printing command.
5) If the printing job works, replace OPE PBA.
6) If the printing job does not work, replace Video PBA.
4-213
Troubleshooting
4.4.7 DADF Skew
Step 1. Opening DADF Cover
Open the DADF Cover, and find a press bracket at the bottom.
Step 2. Removing DADF Cover
1. To access the Bracket easily, disassemble the cover.
2. The cover is hinged at both ends, push the cover toward an one end and disassemble it from the DADF
body.
Push the cover as arrow

indicated, and remove it
Hinge
4-214
Troubleshooting
Step 3. Checking default status
The original position of the bracket is fixed at the center hole (In the production line, a screw is fasten at
the center hole). If excessive skew does show on the image, it is possible to improve the skew quality by
repositioning the bracket.
NOTE
The default position of the bracket ensures the image skew well within the designed spec. If the copied
output is satisfactory, it is recommended to keep the default position and do not adjust the skew further.
Slit Hole Center Hole
Scale
A screw fasten to the center hole.
4-215
Troubleshooting
Step 4. Adjusting Skew
From the output, skew needs to be adjusted and image is as shown below,
Media
1. Remove the screw from the center hole.
2. Push the bracket in the arrow direction to change the

bracket position. Pushing the idle roller connected to
the bracket may be easier to adjust the location of the
bracket.
Expected
Copied Image
image
Using the scale on the bracket, change

the bracket position gradually, and
check the results.
3. Fix the bracket at the new position by screw

fastening at the slit hole.
Slit Hole
Screw in the
left side of the
slit hole
4-216
Troubleshooting
From the output, skew needs to be adjusted and image is as shown below,
Media
1. Remove the screw from the center hole
2. Push the bracket in the arrow direction to change the

bracket position . Pushing the idle roller connected to the
bracket may be easier to adjust the location of the bracket.
Expected Copie
Image d
image
Using the scale on the bracket, change

the bracket position gradually, and
check the results.
3. Fix the bracket at the new position by screw fastening

at the slit hole.
Screw in the
right side of
the slit hole
4-217
ROSE-R_VIDEO_V0.2
FLASH ROM : 32MB JC41-00584A
Service Manual
CONTROLLER ADDR[0:23]
S29GL256P90TFIR1 JC92-02192A
SPGPV4 DATA[0:15] 1107-001589
JC13-PR1109
USBD2.0:CH1 Reserved
DDR_DQ[0:31] ADDR[0:23] ADDR[1:17] USB2.0 Driver
DDR2 SODIMM x 2 LOCAL ISP1761 USBH2.0:CH2 USB HOST
DDR_AD[0:13] DDR2C DATA[0:31] DATA[0:31]
1GB+1GB(opt.) 0904-002093 OP_MAIN
USBH2.0:CH3 USB2.0 HUB USBH2.0:CH1 JC92-01866A
JC92-01880A DDR_nCS[0:3]
USB2514
LOCAL BUS
BASE:[000] / EXT.:[001] 0904-002329 USBH2.0:CH2 ENGINE PBA
5.1.1 Video controller
5.1 Block diagram
I2C:CH0 JC92-02195A
I2C ADDR[1:8]
RTC :2CH
LPEC1 FDI
GPIO
M41T00M6TR I2C:CH1 DATA[0:7]
JC13-00020A JC92-01616A
1206-001026
5. System diagram
JTAG
USB2.0 HUB
[1101000] USB USBD2.0:CH1 USB2514 USBD2.0:CH1 USB PRINT
0904-002329
TRANS.
GIGA NW NW 88E118 MAC_CONTROL RGMII
1205-003298 HDD:160GB
SATA SATA IF JC59-00030A SCAN ASS’Y
’Y
5-1
UART DADF CPU MOTOR D.
UART
JC96- S3F443FX A3977
SCAN
UART:CH0 DEBUG D.MOTOR 03553A 0903-001411 1103-001535
System diagram
0: DEBUG
1: NC IF
2: NC JC92- S.MOTOR CCD AFE
3: MODEM UART:CH3 FAX CCDM
01884A TCD2914 LM98714
JC92-01981A JC96-
4: NC RGB
5: NC 04338A
PLL
RTC 6: DADF UART:CH6
PCI 7: NC
ENGINE BOARD CLK IMAGE PROCESSOR

JC92-02195A
-02195A CIP6_IDSEL(19) MSOK
JC92-01802A
nREADY [111]
JC13-00044A
LPEC3 J4E MOT.D MOTOR
nPRINT
JC13-00035A JC13-00027A A3977SLP DESER.
PSYNC[CMYK] 1003-001535 MOTOR MOTOR AFE I/F AFE[4:15] DS90CR218A
VIDEO 1006-001375
ENGINE LSU LSYNC[CMYK] CONTROL
CONTROL CONTROL PCI BRIDGE PAD[0:31] SA[0:13] DDR2 :256MB
VCLK[CMYK]
PCI Ex PCIex_CONTROL PI7C9X111SLBFDE PCIC DDR2C K4T1G164QD x 2
LPEC3 / LSU VDO[CMYK,1/2] PCI_CONTROL DQ[0:31] 1105-001718
0904-002451
ROSE HW TEAM
Samsung Electronics
System diagram
5.1.2 Engine controller
5-2
System diagram
5.1.3 OPE unit
5-3
System diagram
5.1.4 DADF
5-4
System diagram
5.1.5 SCF/HCF
5-5
System diagram
5.2 Connection diagram

5.2.1 Video controller
CN5
FAN CCD
FAN
1
2
1
2
24V
nSENS_FAN_CCD PBA-SCAN IF
3 3 PWM_FAN_CCD
PBA-INVERTER
CN4 CN2
1 SENSOR XE˅ LAMP ON
PHOTO
CLX-8540ND
2
INTERRUPTOR GND 1 3
VIDEO PBA
3 1 VCC_COVER_OPEN
2
1
2 GND nON_XE_LAMP 2 2
3 nFALT_COVER_OPEN 24V 3 1
1 4 VCC_CCD_HOME
PHOTO 5 GND
2
INTERRUPTOR 6 nSCANNER_HOME
3
CN1
SCAN MOTOR
SCAN_MTR_B 1 4
H
SCAN_MTR_NB 2 3
STEP MOTOR I
DADF SCAN_MTR_NA 3 2
G
(see DADF part for more information) SCAN_MTR_A 4 1
H
CN6
DADF IF V
O
16 1 24V CN3 L
PAPER SENSOR (APS) 3
15 2 24V PHOTO T
2
14 3 GND INTERRUPTOR A
GND 1 1
PBA-DADF
13 4 GND G
5V 2
12 5 3.3V E
APS_LG 3
11 6 GND GND 4 3
10 7 5V PHOTO
5V 5 2
9 8 GND INTERRUPTOR
APS_LT 6 1
8 9 nRST_DADF
7 10 TXD_DADF
6 11 RXD_DADF
5 12 DADF_P_POS
4 13 nSTOP_DADF
2
1
3 14 GND
2 15 GND CCDM MODULE
1 16 GND ( XE LAMP )
CN7
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
10
11
12
13
14
15
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
GND
5V2
GND
3.3V
GND
3.3V
GND
3.3V
GND
CCD_WLED_ON
GND
5V2
GND
5V2
GND
CCD_ADC(0)
CCD_ADC(1)
GND
CCD_ADC(2)
SM_SCAN_NA
SM_SCAN_B
24V
GND
GND
5V2
CCD_ADC(3)
GND
DADF_TXD
DADF_P_POS
GND
VCC_COVER_OPEN
VCC_CCD_HOME
(NC)
PWM_FAN_CCD
APS_LG
GND
GND
APS_LT
nSENS_FAN_CCD
PWM_CCD_LAMP
nSCANNER_HOME
nFLAT_COVER_OPEN
nSTOP_DADF
DADF_RXD
nRST_DADF
5V2
3.3V
GND
24V
SM_SCAN_NB
SM_SCAN_A
CCD_ADC(4)
CCD_ADC(5)
GND
CCD_ADC(6)
CCD_ADC(7)
GND
PItg_CIP5
GND
SCAN_CONTROL2
GND
24V
GND
GND
AFE_SDATA
AFE_SCLK
AFE_SLOAD
GND
ADC_CLK_M
ADC_CLK_P
SCAN IF 2
SCAN IF 1
CN18
CN16
CN19
GRAPHIC UI PANEL FDI
(see UI part for more information)
GND 1
GND 2
CN2
CN13 3.3V 3
USB OPE 5V2 4
4 DETECT_FDI 5
3 1 DN_PANEL nNOT_READY_FDI 6
2 2 DP_PANEL nCOPY_EXIT_FDI 7
PBA-OPE MAIN
1 3 GND nCOPY_CNT_FDI 8
nPZOOM_FDI 9
nPTRAY_FDI 10
nEN_FDI 11
CN12
CN1 OPE MAIN IF
10 1 24V_OPE CN3 CN19

9 DEBUG CIP6_DEBUG CN15
2 5V2
8 USB DEVICE
3 5V2
7 4 5V2 1 3.3V 1 3.3V
VBUS_DEVICE_MPP 1
6 5 nRST_PANEL 2 DEBUG_TXD 2 CIP6_DEBUG_TXD
DM_DEVICE_1761 2
5 6 SOFT_BUTTON 3 DEBUG_RXD 3 CIP6_DEBUG_RXD
DP_DEVICE_1761 3
4 7 GND 4 GND 4 GND
DGND 4
3 8 GND FGND 5
2 9 GND FGND 6
1 10 GND
CN4 CN11
PBA_VIDEO
CLX8540ND
JTAG MASTER SOK

CN14
1 3.3V 1 3.3V USB DIRECT
2 TDO 2 GND
3 nTRST 3 SCL_MSOK nOC_HOST 1
4 TCLK 4 SDA_MSOK DM_HOST 2
5 TMS_ARM 5 nMSOK_DETECT DP_HOST 3
6 TDI 6 GND DGND 4
7 nRESET FGND 5
FAX opt˅ 8 DGND FGND 6
CN10
MODEM IF
CN6
NETWORK
1 1 5V2
2 2 CML_MODEM
GND 1
3 3 GND
1.8_DDR 2
4 4 (NC)
NDIP_3 3
5 5 GND
NDIN_3 4
6 6 (NC)
NDIP_2 5
7 7 nRST_MODEM
NDIN_2 6
8 8 GND
NDIP_1 7
9 9 GND
NDIN_1 8
10 10 GND
NDIP_0 9
11 11 MODEM_TXD
NDIN_0 10
12 12 GND
2.5V 11
13 13 MODEM_RXD
LED_2 12
14 14 GND
PBA-FAX
2.5V 13
15 15 GND
LED_NPC 14
16 16 GND
DGND 15
17 17 nCTS_MODEM
DGND 16
18 18 (NC)
19 19 3.3V
20 20 3.3V
21 21 GND CN7
22 22 GND SATA IF
23 23 SPK_OUT
24 24 GND GND 1 1
25 25 GND SATA_TX_P 2 2
26 26 GND SATA_TX_M 3 3
27 27 GND GND 4 4
28 28 GND SATA_RX_M 5 5
29 29 (NC) SATA_RX_P 6 6
30 30 GND GND 7 7
HDD
31 31 GND
32 32 GND
33 33 nRI_MODEM CN8
34 34 GND SATA POWER
35 35 GND
36 36 nDCD_MODEM 5V2 1 1
GND 2 2
nERROR_ENGINE
nREADY_ENGINE
SOFT_BUTTON
nRST_SYSTEM
nEXIT_ENGINE
nACR_ENGINE
nLSYNC_1_1B
nLSYNC_2_1B
nLSYNC_3_1B
nLSYNC_4_1B
nINT_ENGINE
MAIN_IF
nPRINT_ACK
CN17
VCLK_1_1B
VCLK_2_1B
VCLK_3_1B
VCLK_4_1B
nENDPAGE
VBUS_ENG
nVDI_1_1B
nVDI_2_1B
nVDI_3_1B
nVDI_4_1B
nVDI_1_2B
nVDI_2_2B
nVDI_3_2B
nVDI_4_2B
nPSYNC_1
nPSYNC_2
nPSYNC_3
nPSYNC_4
DN_ENG
DP_ENG
nPRINT
SPK_M
SPK_P
24V4
24V4
24V4
24V4
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
5V1
5V1
5V1
5V1
5V1
5V1
5V1
5V1
5V2
5V2
5V2
5V2
5V2
5V2
5V2
5V2
5V3
5V3
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
5-6
System diagram
5.2.2 Engin controller

CN37
CN33 CN34
80
79
78
77
76
75
74
73
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
FINISHER
nLSYNC_4_1B
nLSYNC_3_1B
nLSYNC_2_1B
nLSYNC_1_1B
GND
VCLK_4_1B
GND
VCLK_3_1B
GND
VCLK_2_1B
GND
VCLK_1_1B
GND
nVDI_4_2B
GND
nVDI_3_2B
GND
nVDI_2_2B
GND
nVDI_1_2B
GND
nVDI_4_1B
GND
nVDI_3_1B
GND
nVDI_2_1B
GND
nVDI_1_1B
GND
SOFT_BUTTON
SPK_M
SPK_P
24V4
24V4
GND
24V4
24V4
GND
nPRINT_ACK
nEXIT_ENGINE
nINT_ENGINE
nERROR_ENGINE
nACR_ENGINE
nREADY_ENGINE
5V3
5V3
GND
5V2
5V2
5V2
5V2
GND
5V2
5V2
5V2
5V2
GND
5V1
5V1
5V1
5V1
GND
5V1
5V1
5V1
5V1
GND
DP_ENG
DN_ENG
VBUS_ENG
GND
nRST_SYSTEM
nENDPAGE
nPRINT
GND
nPSYNC_4
nPSYNC_3
nPSYNC_2
nPSYNC_1
GND
15 1 1 nDETECT_FINISHER
PBA-FINISHER_IF
14 2 2 FINISHER_TXD
ENGINE PBA
MAIN_IF
CLX-8540ND
CN12
13 3 3 FINISHER_RXD
12 4 4 nRST_FINISHER
11 5 5 IF_FINISHER
7501S-15G1T
10 6 6 3.3V
9 7 7 5V3
D-SUB
8 8 8 24V3
7 9 9 24V3
6 10 10 24V3
5 11 11 GND
4 12 12 GND
3 13 13 GND
2 14 14 GND
PBA-CLX8540_ENGINE
1 15 15 GND
CN27
1 FAN & FUSER & HUMI
FAN 2
4
3
2
1
5
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
3
1 24V3
2 SENS_FAN_SMPS
GND
DEBUG_RXD
DEBUG_TXD
3.3V
PANEL_RXD
nRST_PANEL
PANEL_TXD
5V3
GND
GND
DP(DPULLUP)
DN
VBUS
PROGRAM
nTRST
GND
3.3V
1.8V
TDI
TCLK
3 PWM_SMPS_FAN
DOWNLOAD
1 4 GND
DEBUG
2
PANEL
5 EN_RELAY_AC
CN11
CN10
CN14
USB
CN9
3
PBA-FDB 4
6
7
ZERO_CROSS
HEAT_FUSER2
5 8 HEAT_FUSER1
6 9 24VS2 CN6
10 OUT_TEMP EXIT SENS
11 GND
12 HUMIDITY 3.3V 1 1
1 PHOTO
HUMIDITY / 13 5V3 GND 2 2
2 INTERRUPTOR
TEMPARATURE nSENS_P_EXIT 3 3
3
SENSOR
4
CN35
T1 ENGAGE SENS
3.3V 1 1
PHOTO
GND 2 2
INTERRUPTOR
nSENS_T1_ENGAGE 3 3
CN1 CN40
HVPS3
1 CN31
1 GND
2 REGI SENS
2 GND
PBA-HVPS_S
3 3 GND
4 4 GND GND 1 1 PHOTO
5 5 24VS2 nSENS_REGI 2 2 INTERRUPTOR
6 6 24VS2 5V3 3 3 -Reflective
7 7 5V_HVPS
8 8 PWM_FUSER_BIAS_N
9 9 PWM_FUSER_BIAS_P_S2
10 10 PWM_DEV_DC_4_S2 CN1
11 11 PWM_DEV_DC_2_S2 EXIT
12 12 PWM_DEV_DC_1_S2
13 13 PWM_DEV_DC_3_S2
3.3V 1 1
14 14 PWM_SAWPLATE_S2 PHOTO
GND 2 2
INTERRUPTOR
nSENS_OUTBIN_FULL 3 3
24V3 4
GATE_CLUTCH 5
1 ELECTRIC-
2 CLUTCH
CN100
LSU TEMP
CN25 LSU_TEMP 1 1
CN7 CN1 GND 2 THERMISTOR
HVPS1 2
(ROSE 䝬䞌㟝, Magnolia 㜄㉐⏈
㇠㟝㙼䚜.)
CN21
1 1 READ_MHV_4(K) LSU P-MOTOR
1 GND
2 2 READ_MHV_2(M)
2 GND
3 GND 3 3 GND
4 4 PWM_DEV_DC_4(K) 24V4 1 1
4 24VS2 GND 2 2
5 5 PWM_DEV_DC_2(M)
5 24VS2 nSTART_LSU_MOT_1 3 3
6 5V3 6 6 PWM_MHV_4(K) CN38
7 7 PWM_MHV_2(M) 1 nREADY_LSU_1_2 4 4
7 PWM_FUSER_BIAS PHOTO MP
8 8 GND 2 CLK_LSU_MOT_1 5 5
8 PWM_DEV_DC_4 INTERRUPTOR
9 9 24VS2 3 24V4 6 6
9 PWM_DEV_DC_2 CN39 1 GND 7 7
10 PWM_DEV_DC_1 10 10 PWM_AC_VPP_1(Y) WASTE MOT & LSU CLN DC MOTOR 1 3.3V
11 11 PWM_AC_VPP_2(M) 2 nSTART_LSU_MOT_4 8 8
11 PWM_DEV_DC_3 2 GND
12 12 PWM_AC_VPP_3(C) ELECTRIC- 1 nREADY_LSU_3_4 9 9
12 PWM_SAWPLATE 3 SENS_MP_EMPTY
13 13 PWM_AC_VPP_4(K) CLUTCH 2 CLK_LSU_MOT_4 10 10
DMOT_LSU_CLN_OUTA 1 4 24V4
14 14 PWM_AC_1(Y) 1
DMOT_LSU_CLN_OUTB 2 PHOTO 5 MP_CLUTCH
15 15 PWM_AC_2(M) 2
3.3V 3 INTERRUPTOR ELECTRIC- 1 6 24V4
16 16 PWM_AC_3(C) 3
GND 4 CLUTCH 2 7 MP_FEED_CLUTCH
CN3 17 17 PWM_AC_4(K) 8 SPK_P
nSENS_LSU_CLEAN 5
18 18 nEN_AC_1(Y) 24VS1 6 9 SPK_M CN34
1
1 1 PWM_LSU_SIDE_FAN 19 19 nEN_AC_2(M) ON_DMOT_WASTE 7 DC MOTOR 1 LSU 1&2
2 SPEAKER
FAN 2 2 SENS_FAN_LSU_DISE 20 20 nEN_AC_3(C) 3.3V 8 2
3 3 GND 21 21 nEN_AC_4(K) GND 9
22 22 24VS2 nSENS_WASTE_MOT 10 1
23 23 GND PHOTO CN18
2
CN4 24 24 PWM_MHV_1(Y) INTERRUPTOR COVER OPEN LOWER LSU_LD_1_POWER 1 1
3
25 25 PWM_MHV_3(C) nLDON_LSU_1 2 2
26 26 PWM_DEV_DC_1(Y) 1 GND 3 3
1 1 GND SWITCH 1 24V1
27 27 PWM_DEV_DC_3(C) 2 nHSYNC_1_P 4 4
PBA- 2 2 WASTE_FULL CN4 2 24V1
28 28 5V_HVPS nHSYNC_1_N 5 5
WASTE_SENSOR 3 3 ON_WASTE_LED STEP MOTOR 3 (NC)
29 29 READ_MHV_1(Y) GND 6 6
4 4 5V3 1 1 4 24VS1
30 30 READ_MHV_3(C) SWITCH 5V_LSU 7 7
2 2 5 24VS1
STEP MOTOR nSH_LSU_1_2B 8 8
B_STEP_EXIT 1 3
NB_STEP_EXIT 2 4 GND 9 9
NA_STEP_EXIT 3 VDO_1_2B_N 10 10
A_STEP_EXIT 4 VDO_1_2B_P 11 11
B_STEP_DUPLEX 5 CN7 GND 12 12
1 COVER OPEN UPPER
NB_STEP_DUPLEX 6 VDO_1_1B_N 13 13
2
CN33 NA_STEP_DUPLEX 7 STEP MOTOR VDO_1_1B_P 14 14
CN2 3 1 1 5V3
HVPS2 A_STEP_DUPLEX 8 SWITCH GND 15 15
4 2 2 (NC) nSH_LSU_1_1B 16 16
3 5VS3 LSU_LD_2_POWER 17 17
nLDON_LSU_2 18 18
1 1 GND CN5 GND 19 19
BLDC FUSER nHSYNC_2_P 20 20
PBA-HVPS_L
2 2 WASTE_FULL
3 3 GND CN23 nHSYNC_2_N 21 21
4 4 PWM_LSU_SIDE_FAN SMPS1(24V) GND 22 22
5 5 READ_THV1_4(K) BLDC_FUSER_DIR 1 1 5V_LSU 23 23
6 6 READ_THV1_2(M) CLK_FUSER_ITB 2 2 nSH_LSU_2_1B 24 24
nBLDC_FUSER_READY 3 3 1 1 24V1 GND 25 25
7 7 GND 2 2 GND
8 8 PWM_FUSER_BIAS nBLDC_FUSER_EN 4 4 VDO_2_1B_N 26 26
5V3 5 5 3 3 24V2 VDO_2_1B_P 27 27
9 9 nEN_THV2 BLDC
BLDC_FUSER_BRAKE 6 6 4 4 GND GND 28 28
10 10 PWM_THV1_4(K) 5 5 24V3
11 11 PWM_THV1_2(M) GND 7 7 VDO_2_2B_N 29 29
GND 8 8 6 6 GND VDO_2_2B_P 30 30
12 12 GND
7 7 24V4
LSU
13 13 24VS2 24VS2 9 9 GND 31 31
24VS2 10 10 8 8 GND nSH_LSU_2_2B 32 32
14 14 PWM_THV1_1(Y)
15 15 PWM_THV1_3(C)
16 16 PWM_THV2
17 17 PWM_SAWPLATE
18 18 5V_HVPS CN20
19 19 READ_THV1_1(Y) CN101 SMPS2(5V)
PBA-SMPS
PBA-ITB_CRUM_IF
20 20 READ_THV1_3(C) ITB CRUM IF CN1

21 21 READ_THV2
1 1 5V1_SMPS CN22
22 22 SENS_FAN_LSU_SIDE GND 1 1
2 2 GND LSU 3&4
23 23 ON_WASTE_LED SCL2_LPEC3 2 2
24 24 5V3 3 3 5V2_SMPS
SDA2_LPEC3 3 3
4 4 GND
3.3V 4 4
5 5 5V3_SMPS
6 6 GND
LSU_LD_3_POWER 1 1
nLDON_LSU_3 2 2
CN30 GND 3 3
DUPLEX & TOP SENS 1 CN17 nHSYNC_3_P 4 4
PHOTO
CN24 2 SMPS3(signal) nHSYNC_3_N 5 5
INTERRUPTOR
BLDC OPC 3.3V 1 3 GND 6 6
GND 2 5V_LSU 7 7
1 1 5V3_SMPS(feedback)
nSENS_DUPLEX_READY 3 nSH_LSU_3_2B 8 8
1 2 2 EN_24V
1 BLDC_OPC_DIR GND 4 GND 9 9
2 1 3 3 24V4(feedback)
2 CLK_BLDC_OPC nSENS_TOP 5 PHOTO VDO_3_2B_N 10 10
3 2 4 4 (NC)
3 nBLDC_OPC_READY 5V3 6 INTERRUPTOR VDO_3_2B_P 11 11
4 3 5 5 (NC)
4 nBLDC_OPC_EN GND 12 12
5 6 6 (NC)
BLDC 5 5V3 VDO_3_1B_N 13 13
6 6 BLDC_OPC_BRAKE VDO_3_1B_P 14 14
7 7 GND GND 15 15
8 8 GND CN29 nSH_LSU_3_1B 16 16
9 9 24VS1 CLUTCHS CN3 (NC) 17 17
1 ELECTRIC- 1
10 10 24VS1 PHOTO THERMISTOR LSU_LD_4_POWER 18 18
2 CLUTCH 2
11 DMOT_T1_OUTA INTERRUPTOR nLDON_LSU_4 19 19
3
12 DMOT_T1_OUTB 24V4 1 GND 20 20
PICKUP_CLUTCH 2 1 3.3V nHSYNC_4_P 21 21
1 24V4 3 1 ELECTRIC- 2 GND nHSYNC_4_N 22 22
DC MOTOR 1
2 FEED_CLUTCH 4 2 CLUTCH THERMISTOR 3 nDETECT_COVER_EXIT GND 23 23
2
24V4 5 4 FUSER_THERM1 5V_LSU 24 24
REGI_CLUTCH 6 5 GND nSH_LSU_4_1B 25 25
1 ELECTRIC- 1 6 FUSER_THERM2 GND 26 26
THERMISTOR 7 GND
2 CLUTCH 2 VDO_4_1B_N 27 27
8 FUSER_FUSE1 VDO_4_1B_P 28 28
CN12 (DEVE 1) CN11 CN77
CN32 9 FUSER_FUSE2 GND 29 29
CN3 (DEVE 2) DEVE CRUM
SCF 1 10 GND VDO_4_2B_N 30 30
CN4 (DEVE 3) PBA-F_CRUM 2 VDO_4_2B_P 31 31
CN5 (DEVE 4) 3 GND 32 32
1 nSH_LSU_4_2B 33 33
1 24VS1
PBA-DEVE_CRUM_IF
2 (NC) 1 J11 (NC) 34 34

2 GND
1 TSEN_VCONT_1,2,3,4 3 (NC) 2 J10 CN26
3 TSEN_VCONT_1
2 24VS1 4 GND 3 J9 1 BLDC BK
4 TONER_CON_1 PHOTO
3 TONER_CON_1,2,3,4 5 GND 4 J8 2
5 TSEN_VCONT_2 INTERRUPTOR
4 GND 6 GND 5 J7 3
6 TONER_CON_2
(see SCF part for more information)
5 GND 7 nCMD_REQ_SCF 6 J6 1 3.3V

7 TSEN_VCONT_3
6 SCL2_LPEC3 8 SCF_RXD 7 J5 2 GND
8 TONER_CON_3
DRAWER ˀ CONNECTOR
7 SDA_LPEC3 9 nRST_SCF 8 J4 3 nSENS_OPCHOME_4

9 TSEN_VCONT_4
8 3.3V 10 4 BLDC_BK_DIR
AMP, 5-292178-1
10 TONER_CON_4 3.3V_SCF 9 J3 1 CN41 1

11 5 CLK_BLDC_BK THERMISTOR
11 5V3 24V3 10 J2 2 ACR 2
12 24V3 11 J1 6 nBLDC_BK_READY
12 EN_ERASER_123 3
13 (NC) 12 J22 7 nBLDC_BK_EN
CN7 (ERASER 1) 13 EN_ERASER_4 4
14 (NC) 13 J21 8 5V3
14 GND 5
CN8 (ERASER 1) 15 BLDC 9 BLDC_BK_BRAKE 1
15 3.3V GND 14 J20 6 INNER_TEMP 1
CN9 (ERASER 1) 16 10 GND 2
16 SCL2_LPEC3 GND 15 J19 7 GND 2
CN10 (ERASER 1) 17 11 GND 3 ACR/CTD SEMSOR
17 SDA2_LPEC3 (NC) 16 J18 8 ACR_F_S 3
18 12 24VS2 4
18 GND IF_SCF 17 J17 9 ACR_F_P 4
1 5V3 13 24VS2 5
nBUSY_SCF 18 J16 10 PWM_ACR_F_LED 5
2 EN_ERASER_123,4
SCF_TXD 19 J15 GND 6
3.3V_SCF 20 J14 5V3_ACR 7
GND 21 J13 ACR_R_S 8 1
24V3 22 J12 ACR_R_P 9 2
1 CN16 PWM_ACR_R_LED 10 3 ACR/CTD SEMSOR
DC MOTOR GND 11 4
2 T2 & BLDC ITB
5V3_ACR 12 5
5V3_CTD 13
1 1 GND 14
CN8 PHOTO 1 DMOT_T2_OUTB
PHOTO 2 ADC_CTDP_SH 15 1
CN102 2 INTERRUPTOR 2 DMOT_T2_OUTA
CN1 (CRUM Y) CN9 BASE & DUPLEX INTERRUPTOR 3 ADC_CTDS_SH 16 2
TB CRUM IF 3 3 3.3V
CN2 (CRUM C) CTD_LED_CUR 17 3 ACR/CTD SEMSOR
4 GND
CN3 (CRUM M) SEL_CTD 18 4
5 nSENS_T2_ENGAGE
CN4 (CRUM K) 1 GND 19 5
1 1 ON_DMOT_TNR_1 PHOTO 6 BLDC_ITB_DIR
2 1 (NC) 20
2 2 EN_DMOT_TNR_1 3.3V 1 INTERRUPTOR 7 CLK_BLDC_ITB
3 2
3 3 ON_DMOT_TNR_2 GND 2 8 nBLDC_ITB_READY
1 (NC) 3
4 4 EN_DMOT_TNR_2 nSENS_PAPER_UPLIMIT 3 9 nBLDC_ITB_EN
2 (NC) 4
5 5 ON_DMOT_TNR_3 3.3V 4 10 5V3
3 GND 1 5
6 6 EN_DMOT_TNR_3 GND 5 DC MOTOR BLDC 11 BLDC_ITB_BRAKE
PBA-TB_CRUM_IF
4 SCL 2 6
7 7 ON_DMOT_TNR_4 nSENS_P_EMPTY 6 12 GND
5 DATA 7
8 8 EN_DMOT_TNR_4 ON_DMOT_ELEV 7 13 GND
6 VCC 8
9 9 GND 24V3 8 14 24VS2
7 (NC) 1 9 CN15
10 10 SCL0_LPEC3 3.3V 9 15 24VS2
8 (NC) 2 10 ACR
11 11 SDA0_LPEC3 GND 10 3 (ROSE 䝬䞌㟝, ROSE_R 㜄㉔㇠㟝
12 12 3.3V nDETECT_CST 11 4 PBA-CASSETE 㙼䚜)
GND 12 5
CN5 (MOT Y) nPAPERSIZE2 13 6
nPAPERSIZE1 14 7 CN28
1 ON_DMOT_TNR_1 nPAPERSIZE0 15 BLDC DEVE INNER_TEMP 1
2 EN_DMOT_TNR_1 3.3V 16 1 GND 2
PHOTO
GND 17 2 ACR_F_S 3
1 INTERRUPTOR
nSENS_PAPER_NEAREND 18 PHOTO 3 ACR_F_P 4
CN6 (MOT M) 2 1 3.3V
24VS1 19 INTERRUPTOR PWM_ACR_F_LED 5
3 2 GND
1 ON_DMOT_TNR_2 DUPLEX_CLUTCH 20 GND 6
3 nSENS_OPCHOME_123
2 EN_DMOT_TNR_2 PWM_DUPLEX1_FAN 21 5V3_ACR 7
1 4 BLDC_DEV_DIR
SENS_FAN_DUPLEX1 22 1 ELECTRIC- ACR_R_S 8
GND 23 2 5 CLK_BLDC_DEV
2 CLUTCH 6 nBLDC_DEV_READY ACR_R_P 9
CN7 (MOT C) PWM_DUPLEX1_FAN 24 3 PWM_ACR_R_LED 10
4 7 nBLDC_DEV_EN
SENS_FAN_DUPLEX1 25 GND 11
1 ON_DMOT_TNR_3 1 5 8 5V3
GND 26 BLDC 5V3_ACR 12
2 EN_DMOT_TNR_3 2 FAN 6 9 GND
3.3V 27 ADC_CTDS_OM 13
3 7 10 GND
GND 28 ADC_CTDP_OM 14
8 11 GND
CN8 (MOT K) nSENS_DUPLEX 29 PWM_CTD_LED 15
(NC) 30 9 12 24VS1
1 13 24VS1 GND 16
1 ON_DMOT_TNR_4 10 5V3_ACR 17
2 FAN 14 (NC)
2 EN_DMOT_TNR_4
3
1
PHOTO
2
INTERRUPTOR
3
5-7
System diagram
5.2.3 OPE unit
5-8
System diagram
5.2.4 DADF
5-9
System diagram
5.2.5 SCF/HCF
5-10
Reference information
6. Reference information
This chapter contains the tools list, list of abbreviations used in this manual, and a guide to the location space
required when installing the printer. A definition of test pages and Wireless Network information definition is
also included.
6.1 Tool for troubleshooting

The following tools are recommended safe and easy troubleshooting as described in this service manual.
• DVM (Digital Volt Meter) • Cleaning Equipments

Standard : Indicates more than 3 digits. Standard : An IPA (Isopropyl Alcohol) dry wipe tissue
or a gentle neutral detergent and lint-free
cloth.
• Driver • Vacuum Cleaner

Standard : “ -” type, “+” type (M3 long, M3 short, M2
long, M2 short).
• Spring Hook
Standard : For general use
• Tweezers
Standard : For general home use, small type.
• Software (Driver) installation CD ROM

• Cotton Swab
Standard : F
or general home use, for medical
service.
6-1
6.2 Acronyms and abbreviations

The table below explains abbreviations used in this service manual.
The contents of this service manual are declared with abbreviations in many parts. Please refer to the
table.
6.2.1 Acronyms
ABS Automatic Background Suppression(a FDI Foreign Device Interface
kind of copy feature) FIA Foreign Interface Attachment
APF Automatic Paper Feeder(Tray) FRU Field Replaceable Unit
BOOTP BOOTSTRAP PROTOCOL FPOT First Print Out Time
CCD Charged Coupled Device GW GateWay
CIS Contact Image Sensor HH High Temperature, High Humidity
CPM Copies Per Minute (Testing Chamber conditions)
CP Control Panel(= OPE) HPVC Halftone Printing Video Controller in the
CQ Copy Quality SPGPm (Graphic Processor for Copy)
CRU Customer Replaceable Unit IDC International Data Corp.
CRUM CRU Memory IMAP Internet Message Access Protocol
CW Center Ware IPP Internet Printing Protocols
CWDP Center Ware Device Discovery IPM Images Per Minutes
Software(Samsung equivalent of IPX Internetwork Packet Exchange
Samsung’s SyncThru) IQ Image Quality
CWIS Center Ware Internet Services ITU International Telecommunication Union
DADF Duplex Auto Document Feeder JBIG Joint Binary Image Group
(= DADH) (a kind of image data coding method)
DC Direct Connect JPEG Joint Photographic Expert Group
DDNS Dynamic Domain Name System (a kind of image data coding method)
DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol LCD Liquid Crystal Display
DLC Data Link Control LEF Long Edge Feeding
DNS Domain Name System LL Low Temperature, Low Humidity
ECM Error Correction Mode (Testing Chamber conditions)
ECP Enhanced Capability Port LPR/LPD Line Printer Daemon Protocols
e-Coil Extended Coil technology for (LPR is a TCP-based protocol)
Rapid(Fast) Fusing. LSU Laser Scanning Unit
EH&S Samsung Environment, Health, LUI Local User Interface
& Safty MCBF Mean Copy Between Failure
ESMTP Extended Simple Mail Transfer Protocol MDSP Multiple Document Single Printout
EP Electro Photography MFP Multi-Functional Product
EPC Electric Pre-Collation MH Modified Huffman
FCOT First Copy Out Time (a kind of image data coding method)
6-2
MIB Management Information Base RT-OS Real Time Operating System

MIME Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions RX Receive
MR Modified Read S2E Scan-To-Email
(a kind of image data coding method) SAD Solid Area Density
MMR Modified and Modified Read SC Service Call
(a kind of image data coding method) SCF Second Cassette Feeder
MN std Multi-National Standard SDSP Single Document Single Printout
MSOK Master SOK(System Operation Key) SDMP Single Document Multiple Printout
MSO Mixed Size Original SDR Shut Down Rate
MP Multi Purpose SEF Short Edge Feeding
MPBF Mean Print Between Failure SIR Sacrified(or Standard) Image Reference
MSI Multi Sheet Input SOK System Operation Key
MTBF Mean Time Between Failure sRGB Standard RGB
MTTR Mean Time To Repair (Color Coordinate System)
NCP Network Control Protocol SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol
NIC Network Interface Card TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet
NOS Network Operating System Protocol
NN Normal Temperature, Normal Humidity TBC(or tbc) To Be Confirmed
(Testing Chamber conditions) TBD(or tbd) To Be Determined
NSDR Non-Shut Down Rate(=USDR) TIFF (Adobe & Aldus) Tagged Image File
NW Network Format
OD Optical Density TRIM Technical Retrofit Interim Maintenance
OHD On Hook Dial TTM Time to Market
OSOK Optional SOK(System Operation Key) TX Transmit
OP Operational Procedure UI User Interface
PCL Printer Control Language UMC Unit Manufacturing Cost
PDF (Adobe) Portable Document Format UMR Unscheduled Maintenance Ratio
PPM Pages Per Minutes UPnP Universal Plug and Play
PQ Print Quality USB Universal Serial Bus
PS/3 PostScript Level-3 USDR Un-Shut Down Rate(=NSDR)
PVC Printing Video Controller in the XCMI Samsung’s Management Information
SPGPm(Graphic Processor for Printer) Base
QCD Quality, Cost, and Delivery WA Warranty Action
RCP Remote Control Panel W x D x H Width x Depth x Height
6-3
6.2.2 Service parts
ACRONYM EXPLANATION
ELA HOU-SCANNER ASS’Y ELA=Electrical Assembly, HOU =Housing
MEA UNIT-COVER PA EXIT ASS’Y MEA= Mechanical Assembly, PA=Paper
PMO-TRAY EXTENTION MP NE PMO= Processing Mold
MP=Multi-Purpose(Bypass) tray
NE=for NEC (common as Samsung Halk printer)
MEC-CASSETTE ASS’Y(LETTER) MEC = Mechanic Combined unit
COVER-M-FRONT M=Mold
MPR-NAME/PLATE MPR= Machinery Press,
UNIT-LSU LSU =Laser Scanning Unit
SMPS-SMPS(V1)+HVPS SMPS =Switching Mode Power Supply
HVPS =High Voltage Power Supply
ELA-OPC UNIT SET OPC=Organic Photo-Conductive
ELA HOU-MP ASS’Y MP =Multi-Purpose (Bypass) tray
PBA MAIN-MAIN PBA =Printed circuit Board Assembly
PMO-CONNECT PAPER MFP MFP =Multi-Functional Peripheral
FAN-DC DC =Direct Current
CBF POWER STITCH GRAY CBF= Cable Form
MEA UNIT GUIDE CST PA ASS’Y CST=Cassette(Paper tray), PA=Paper
PBA LIU PBA =Printed circuit Board Assembly
LIU =Line Interface Unit for FAX
SHIELD-P_MAIN LOWER P=Press
CBF HARNESS-LIU GND LIU =Line Interface Unit for FAX
GND= Ground
PMO-COVER FEED AY AY=Assembly
PMO-COVER BRKT MOTER BRKT=Bracket
CBF HARNESS-LSU LSU =Laser Scanning Unit
IPR-SHIELD SMPS UPPERI IPR=Iron Press
PMO-BUSHING P/U.MP P/U=Pickup
MP=Multi-Purpose (Bypass) Tray
PMO-HOLDER GEAR TRr TR= Transfer Roller
SPRING ETC-TR_L TR_L=Transfer Roller - Left
PMO-CAM JAM REMOVE PMO-CAM= Processing Mold-CAM
PMO-LOCKER DEVE DEVE=Developer
6-4
ACRONYM EXPLANATION
SPECIAL SCREW(PANNEL MFP) MFP =Multi-Functional Peripheral
A/S MATERAL-DUMMY UPPER ASS’Y A/S=After-Service
MCT-GLASS ADF MCT= Machinery Cutting
ADF=Automatic Document Feeder
PPR-REGISTRATION EDGE(F) PPR= Processing Press
IPR-HOLDER GLASSI PR=Iron Press
MCT-GLASS SCANNER(LEGAL) MCT= Machinery Cutting
CBF HARNESS-OPE OPE=Operation Panel(Control Panel)
PBA SUB-D_SUB PBA SUB-D_SUB =>Sub Printed circuit Board
Assembly for the D-SUB type electrical connector
(D-Sub) a kind of the connector type(shape ‘D’)
COVER-M-CCD CABLE M=Mold
CCD=Charge Coupled Device
COVER-SCAN LOWER(UMAX) UMAX=> Supplier’s name for CCD module
ICT-INSERT SHAFTI ICT= Iron Cutting
IPR-BRK SCAN BD IPR=Iron Press
BRK=Bracket
BD= Board
CBF SIGNAL-CCD FFC CCD = Charge Coupled Device
FFC =Flexible Flat Cable
COVER-M-OPE M=Mold
OPE=Operation Panel(Control Panel)
KEY-M-COPY M=Mold
PLATE-M-ALPHA KEY M=Molde
ALPHA=Alphabet
PMO-GUIDE DP SIDE DP=Duplex
RING-CS CS= Compress
GEAR-MP/DUP DRV MP =Multi-Purpose (Bypass) tray
DUP DRV = Duplex Driver
IPR-BRKT G DUPI PR=Iron Press
BRKT=BRACKET
G= Ground
UP=Duplex
PMO-BUSHING TX(B4) TX=Transmit
PMO-TRAY CASE, MP MP=Multi-Purpose tray(Bypass tray)
6-5
ACRONYM EXPLANATION
SPRING CS RE CS=Compress
RE=Rear
SPRING CS FR CS=Compress
FR=Front
PMO-BUSHING FINGER, F F=Front
ICT-SHAFT-EXIT LOWER ID ID=Idler
SPRING-EXIT ROLL FD FD=Face Down
PMO-BUSHING_P/U,MP P/U=Pickup
MP =Multi-Purpose (Bypass) tray
PMO-HOLDER CAM MPF MPF=Multi-Purpose Feeder(=MP)
PMO-GEAR P/U MPF P/U=Pickup
MFP =Multi-Functional Peripheral
RPR-RUBBER PICK UP,MP RPR=Rubber Press
PBA SUB-MP SEN PBA SUB-MP-SEN =>Sub Printed circuit Board
Assembly for the MP-SEN(= Multi-Purpose (Bypass)
tray-Sensor)
A/S MATERAL-PICKUP,MP
FOOT-ML80
HOLDER CATCH CST MC2 MC2=>McKInley2 (Samsung Project code name)
IPR-GROUND PLATE A(OPC) OPC=Organic Photo-Conductive
ELA M/M-AUD SPEAKER ELA M/M => Electrical Assembly M/M
AUD=Audio
CBF HARNESS-OPC GND OPC GNG=Organic Photo-Conductive-Ground
IPR-GROUND PLATE SCF SCF=Second Cassette Feeder(Tray2)
PBA SUB-PTL PBA SUB-PTL=>Sub Printed circuit Board Assembly
for the PTL(= Pre Transfer Lamp)
PBA SUB-FEED+P.EMP SEN. PBA SUB-FEED=>Sub Printed circuit Board
Assembly for the feeder
EMP SEN=Empty Sensor
MOTOR STEP-MCK2(MAIN)
GEAR-EXIT/U EXIT/U=EXIT/Upper
GEAR-RDCN FEED INNER RDCN=Reduction
CBF-HARNESS-MAIN-THV WIRE THV =Transfer High Voltage
CBF-HARNESS-MAIN-MHV WIRE MHV= High Voltage(Charge Voltage)
6-6
ACRONYM EXPLANATION
GEAR-EXIT/U,ID U=Upper
ID=Idler
IPR-TERMINAL FU FU=Fuser
PMO-BEARING H/R-F H/R-F=Heat Roller - Front
BEARING-H/R L H/R-L=Heat Roller -Left
PEX-ROLLER EXIT F_UP PEX= Processing Extrude
F_UP=Face Up
SPRING ETC-P/R P/R=Pressure Roller
SPRING(R)-CAU-HOT-FU CAU-HOT-FU = Caution Hot -Fuser
PMO-ARM ACTUATOR PMO-ARM= Processing Mold Arm
LABEL(R)-HV FUSER HV=High Voltage (220V)
LABEL(R)-LV FUSER LV=Low Voltage (110V)
PPR-SPONG SHEET PPR=Plastic Press
IPR-P_PINCH(SCAN)I PR-P = Iron Press
ROLLER-REGI REGI=Registration
PBA SUB-REGI PBA SUB-REGI => Sub Printed circuit Board
Assembly for the Registration
GROUND-P_SCAN ROLLER GROUND-P =Ground-Press
IPR-GUARD C/O S/W C/O = Cover Open
S/W= Switch
MEA UNIT-TX STACKER TX =Transmit
IPR-WASHER SPRING CU CU=Curve
6-7
6.3 A4 ISO 19798 standard pattern

This test page is reproduced at 70% of the normal A4 size.
6-8
6-9
6-10
6-11
6-12
6.4 Model information
6.4.1 Understanding for model code

Model code is inscribed and managed by product standard operation.
If understand the standard operation. It will help to comprehend basic and derived model.
Classification Model abbriviation Feature/Properties

DIGIT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Example C L X - 8 3 8 5 N D
Definition Product Classification Division 1. Speed of Copy Speed 1. New Main feature description
Code Printer Laser X:Fax between Engine (Default A4) model, - N : N/W
Description Class of Beginning code - If same speed series - P : PS
Product letter of models are - If over 10 models - S : N/W+PS
Description printer released with same speed - B : Bluetooth
:C simultaneously are brought into, - T : 2nd CST
higher model is tenth model is - M : Mac Compatible
added +1 at added +1. - X : Scanner
speed code. • Beside above feature
- If over 10 models description, product
with same speed conception to product
are brought into, planning group responsed
tenth model is
added +1.
Description Alphabet - Digit Alphabet
6-13
6.4.2 Understanding material code & name

Material code and name are maintained by standard criteria.
Understanding the criteria are be helpful to order materials.
1. Two different description ways for material code. ( ●: Digit, ■: Letter(Alphabet))
- Type 1 ●●●●-●●●●●● ex) 2007-007961 R-CHIP

- Type 2 ■■●●-●●●●●■ ex)JB96-01268A ELA UNIT-COVER TOP
Type1 : Parts managed by entire divisions : Materials used by all samsung products.
Most electrical parts are under the type 1.
Type 2 : P
arts managed by a division : Material used by a certain product
Most mechanical parts are under type 2.
2. A/S Only material : Only for A/S, not related to product manufacturing.
3. Ass’y material : More than two materials are assembled. If the material order is out of service, the order
can be processed by Ass’y material order.
Picture and numbers are also described on Service manual.
※ Ass’y Material and A/S Only material Code are recognizable by product name.
Those are under type 2 and known by material properties and beginning letters of product name.
Classification Material Code Material Name

A/S Only Material **81-******(JB81-00039A) AS-*****(AS-FUSE)
A/S Only Material **75-******(JB75-00068A) MEC-*****(MEC-CHUTE)
A/S Only Material **92-******(JB92-01131A) PBA-*****(PBA MAIN-CONTROLLER)
A/S Only Material **96-******(JB96-01268A) ELA-*****(ELA UNIT-COVER TOP)
A/S Only Material **97-******(JB97-01089A) MEA-*****(MEA UNIT-PULLEY IDLE)
6-14

Service Manual CLX-8540ND Ver1.1 111103 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual CLX-8540ND Ver1.1 111103 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual

DIGITAL COLOR LASER MFP

High-Speed Single-Path Color A4 MFP ■ 160 GB HDD

■ High Performance CCDM

North America : service.samsungportal.com

chapter 2 Product overview

chapter 3 Maintenance and disassembly

3.1.1 Precautions on maintenance… ……………………………… 3-1

3.2.2.21 Mail box… ……………………………………………… 3-70

chapter 5 System diagram

5.1.5 SCF/HCF… …………………………………………………… 5-5

chapter 6 Reference information

6.1 Tool for troubleshooting… ………………………………………… 6-1

1.1 Safety warning

(2) Use only Samsung replacement parts.

(3) Laser Safety Statement

1.2 Caution for safety

1.2.2 Electric shock and fire safety precautions

1.2.3 Handling precautions

1.2.4 Assembly / Disassembly precautions

1.2.5 Disregarding this warning may cause bodily injury

1.3 ESD precautions

1. Immediately before handling a semiconductor component or semiconductor-equipped assembly, drain

High-Speed Single-Path Color A4 MFP

■ 38 / 38 ppm Network-ready CMFP

Low Operational Cost Highly Efficient Features

Click-Charge Model Ease of Maintenance

Ease of Use Durability & Reliability

Enhanced Features – H/W

Digital Copying Laser Printing

N/W Color Scanning Fax (Optional)

Enhanced Features – S/W

Scan Solution Security

Storage Document Management

N/W Management Job Accounting

2.2.1 General Print Engine

2.2.2 Controller & S/W

* Supported Web Browser:

2.2.6 Paper Handling

2.2.7 Consumables (CRU : Customer Replacement Unit)

• Declared yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798.

2.2.8 Maintenance Parts (FRU : Field Replacement Unit)

2.2.9 Service & Environment

Item Model Name Remark

2.2.11 Model Comparison

Samsung HP Ricoh Konica Minolta

Type A4 Tandem A4 Tandem A3 Tandem A3 Tandem

FCOT(B/C) 14 sec / 14 sec 10sec / 12sec 6.7sec / 9.7sec 8.4sec / 11.7sec

Duplex Available (Std)

Scan Res(dpi) 600X600

HDD 160GB Std 40GB Std 40GB Std 40GB Std

Memory (Max) 1GB / 2GB 448MB / 512MB 1GB 512MB

Mo. Duty Cycle 100K 175K 150K 75K

2.3 System Overview

• The symbol * is a mark for the optional device.

• The symbol * is a mark for the optional device.

1 Finisher (Stacker & Stapler)* 7 Network port

No. Item No. Item

2.3.1 System Configuration

FUSER UNIT DEVELOPER SYSTEM

FDB HVPS DEVE TONER TOUCH DADF

FUSER ITB DEVE IF TB IF WTB COLOR SCAN IF SCAN

DEVE ACR/CTD POLYGON BLDC CASSETTE STEPLER USB

(2) Use only Samsung replacement parts.

(3) Laser Safety Statement

1. Immediately before handling a semiconductor component or semiconductor-equipped assembly, drain

• Declared yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798.

It stores and automatically feeds printing papers.

　 OPEN Heat LOW Heat OVER Heat